JP7362980B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

For example, in Patent Document 1, if a V win does not occur during the small winning game state, when the time saving state ends, there is a time saving end notification that notifies the player that the time saving state has ended, and a left-handed hit to the player. A gaming machine is disclosed that carries out a left-handed driving promotion notification that encourages the user to return to the game and play the game.

JP2018-99307A (Paragraph 0073)

In a gaming machine such as that disclosed in Patent Document 1, when the gaming medium does not pass through a specific area (V winning) in a special state (small winning gaming state), an appropriate display is displayed according to the change in the gaming state. Control needs to be exercised.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state and executes appropriate display control when a gaming medium does not pass through a specific area. There is a particular thing.

The gaming machine of this means is
A gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes a variable display (variable display),
A variable means (V judgment prize winning device 87) that is controlled to an enterable state in which a game medium (game ball) can enter;
an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player, a special state (small winning gaming state) that is different from the advantageous state and in which the variable means is controlled to the enterable state, and a state after the advantageous state. A special state (time saving state) which is a controlled gaming state and in which variable display is executed more frequently than the normal state, and a state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling the special state (time saving state),
The state control means (CPU 103)
When the gaming medium that has entered the variable means passes through a specific area (V winning area 870), it can be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state);
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the game medium is controlled in the special state, it can be controlled to the normal state. When a win occurs and no V prize is won during the small win game, the control is returned to the normal state when the small win game state ends),
comprising a display control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of displaying a display result of variable display of decoration identification information on a display means (image display device 5);
The display control means includes:
In response to being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the normal state, a specific display result (a jackpot combination of decorative symbols (such as "333")) can be displayed on the display means as the display result. and
When being controlled to the special state, in response to being controlled to the special state , the display result is a special display result different from the specific display result (a combination of decorative symbols for small winnings (such as "3V3") ) can be displayed on the display means,
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the game medium is controlled in the special state, the specific display result can be displayed on the display means in the normal state after the special state. (When the control is returned to the normal state without winning a V prize during a small winning game, a jackpot combination of decorative symbols (such as "333") is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the specific display result is displayed in the normal state after the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, thereby making the player aware that the game medium has been controlled in the special state. be able to.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of the present invention, or may have structures other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of the present invention. It may be something that you have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 152F. It is a figure showing a hit type table. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is an explanatory diagram showing a hit determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart which shows starting port switch passage processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hit release preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows small hit end processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in characteristic part 09TM. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type table. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams showing a display result determination table, (B1) and (B2-1) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B2-2) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a hit via jackpot type determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for hyper rush mode time saving 1st to 99th rotations, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for hyper rush mode remaining reservations 1st to 4th rotations. It is an explanatory diagram. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a game flow. It is a time chart showing the control timing of the gaming state regarding the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag. It is a time chart showing the control timing of the game state regarding small hit puncture. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a performance determination process at the time of a fluctuation|variation start. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot combination determination table of decorative symbols. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a symbol stop motion performance and a symbol stop sound performance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production determination processing during a small hit. It is an explanatory view showing a performance mode table of promotion performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding the first promotion performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance aspect concerning the second promotion performance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance determination processing at the end of a small hit. 3 is a time chart showing an example of display control timing for displaying results. 3 is a time chart showing an example of display control timing for displaying results. 7 is a time chart showing a modified example of display control timing for displaying results. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a demonstration display performance determination process. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution condition table for a customer waiting demonstration performance, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution period determination table for a recovery notification performance. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect when a V winning prize occurs and when a small hit puncture occurs. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the production mode when a V winning prize occurs and when a small hit puncture occurs. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the production mode when a V winning prize occurs and when a small hit puncture occurs. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the production mode when a V winning prize occurs and when a small hit puncture occurs. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect when a power outage occurs during a small winning game and when a small winning blowout occurs after recovery. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the performance mode when a power outage occurs during a small winning game and when a small winning puncture occurs after recovery. It is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of the game flow.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the gaming area), a variable display (also referred to as a special game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electroluminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible displays that correspond to variable displays.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. Accordingly, the first pending memory number is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second pending memory number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of performance, etc.) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various performances (performances that notify the progress of the game or make the game more exciting) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be done by turning on/off the light, moving the movable body 32, etc.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. You can.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, An I/O (Input/Output port) 105 is provided.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to send the production control command to the production control board 12 to specify the determination results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and the pre-read judgment. . The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is a "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance control process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 152F)
Next, the characteristic portion 152F of this embodiment will be explained. Regarding the feature section 152F, a technique aimed at a pachinko gaming machine in which setting means can set setting values having different advantages for players, such as the probability of winning a jackpot, will be described below. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also has a function as a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player as the setting value of the jackpot winning probability. .

First, the setting values will be explained. In the pachinko game machine 1 described in this example, the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the setting value by a setting change operation performed by a person on the gaming parlor side (such as a clerk at the gaming parlor) using an operating means such as a predetermined switch. It is said to be composed of

For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) executes a setting change process that allows changing the jackpot winning probability set in the pachinko game machine 1 in response to a setting change operation. As a result, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, a setting change process is executed that allows the jackpot winning probability to be changed by using a display result determination table according to the set value. The setting values are, for example, comprised of six levels (multiple levels) from 1 to 6, and the probability of winning the jackpot increases in the order of setting value 1 < setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. That is, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage is in the order of setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. It increases in stages. It should be noted that the set value may be set in multiple stages, and is not limited to six stages. In this way, as the probability of winning the jackpot can be changed, the ball release rate (number of balls played per unit time (number of prize balls)) will change, so changing the setting value will change the ball release rate. It can also be said that it is something to do.

For example, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value selected by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Among the six levels of setting values, for example, setting values 4 to 6 are called high settings, which have a high probability of winning a jackpot, and setting values 1 to 3, for example, may be called low settings, which have a low probability of winning a jackpot.

Further, the selection probability of the type of jackpot may also be changeable by setting the setting value 1 to setting value 6, similarly to the winning probability of the jackpot. The selection probability of the variation pattern type may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, similar to the jackpot winning probability. The selection probability of the variable pattern may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, similarly to the probability of winning a jackpot.

Regarding the characteristic part 152F, in a pachinko game machine in which any one of a plurality of setting values can be set, when the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, when the RAM 122 as a pending storage buffer is In some cases, a hold series in which hold information determined to be controlled (win) is executed is stored. Specifically, the pending connection means that among the pending information that existed when the jackpot occurred, there is pending information that will become a hit in the future, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the pending information that existed when the jackpot occurred Refers to consecutive wins within the range of pending information in which the next winning occurs consecutively within the range of . In addition, in the case of a small win, it becomes a jackpot via a small win based on the occurrence of a V winning, so it can be said that the pending information of a small win is the pending storage information of a win that will become a jackpot in the future. When such a pending series is executed, a notification effect that notifies that the series is on hold may be executed.

FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 152F. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 152F, the reference numerals and descriptions of the same components as in the front view of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 will be omitted, and the different parts will be described.

In the game area where the game ball that has been hit can flow down, the first path of the flow paths along which the game ball flows down is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and the game ball is flown down. A second path different from the first path among the downstream paths along which the balls flow down is mainly provided in an area on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting the game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left-handed hitting. Hitting the game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right-handed hitting. The first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball to the left side of the game area, so it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area, so it may be called a right-handed route.

Note that the first route and the second route may be configured as different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left gaming area and the right gaming area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the gaming nails within the gaming area.

When the game ball that is fired from the ball launcher and hit into the game area in response to the operation of the ball operation handle 30 is guided to the left game area, it is guided, for example, along the array of game nails. Therefore, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the player to the right gaming area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area because it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

A winning ball device 6A in which a first starting winning opening is formed is provided as a structure into which the game balls that have been distributed can enter the left gaming area of the gaming area. The winning ball device 6A is arranged below the image display device 5. The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first starting hole switch 22A for detecting a game ball that has entered the first starting winning hole.

A passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a V judgment winning device 87 are provided as structures into which the game balls that are divided into the right game area of the gaming area can enter. The variable prize winning ball device 6B has a second starting prize opening into which game balls can be won. In addition, as a switch for detecting a game ball that has entered each, a gate switch 21 is installed inside the passage gate 41, a second starting opening switch 22B is installed inside the second starting winning opening, and a V judgment winning device 87 is installed. Inside, a V winning switch 87a, a V judgment winning switch 15a, and a V judgment discharge switch 15b are provided, respectively.

In the left gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the first starting winning opening of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to cause the game ball to enter the first starting prize opening, the player only has to hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second starting winning opening and the passage gate 41 of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening and the passage gate 41, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

The passage gate 41 is a gate structure through which game balls can enter (pass through). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The normal design will be described later. In the left gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the first starting winning opening of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to cause the game ball to enter the first starting prize opening, the player only has to hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second starting winning opening and the passage gate 41 of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening and the passage gate 41, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

The V judgment winning device 87 is a device for determining the V winning of the game ball, which is a condition for generating a jackpot when a small hit occurs.

The V judgment prize winning device 87 is formed of a transparent member, and it is possible to visually check the game ball passing through the inside. The V judgment winning device 87 has a width at the top that allows the game ball to pass in the front and back direction, and walls on both sides (the front side and the back side) of the passage that slopes from right to left and extends in the left and right direction. A guide path along which the game ball is guided is formed. In the center of the guide path, when a small hit occurs, a signal is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds x 10 open periods + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + end period 1 second). By repeating opening and closing, an operating opening is formed as an opening through which a total of about 10 or more game balls can be won within a predetermined period of time when the opening is open. The path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87 is provided with a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the guided game ball so as to protrude alternately on both sides of the wall, so that when hitting right-handed, , A structure (hereinafter referred to as a deceleration structure) in which the game ball flows slowly is formed in the passage above the operation opening on the upper part of the V judgment winning device 87.

In the small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 is operated for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V judgment winning device 87 is detected or until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Opening control is executed. In the V judgment winning device 87, the portion of the guideway where the operating port is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873. A movable portion 872 that can move forward and backward on the operating port is provided at a position where the operating port can be opened and closed.

The movable part 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the operating port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guideway, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guideway and falls from the left end. do. When the operating port is opened due to the operating state of the movable part 872, the operating port opens in the guideway, so the game ball guided to the guideway can fall from the operating port into the V judgment winning device 87. Become.

Inside the V-judgment winning device 87 (operating port), a V-winning region 870 as a specific region is located at the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the V-judgment winning device 87 as a winning region where the game ball that enters from the operating port can win. Further, a ramp is provided for guiding all of the game balls entering from the operating port onto the V winning area 870 via an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening into which a game ball can enter, and can guide the gaming ball that has entered from the V winning opening downward.

A plate-shaped opening/closing member (not shown) that can switch the V winning area 870 between an open state and a closed state is provided at the top end of the winning hole (V winning hole) of the V winning area 870. There is. The opening/closing member is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening. In the state where the V winning hole is opened depending on the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 is in a state where it can fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, when the V winning opening is closed due to the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870. The ball is placed in a state where it can fall into a winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V judgment winning device 87 is basically in an open state, and in a small winning game state in which the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, one game ball is When entering the V winning area 870 and winning a prize, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a provided in the V winning area 870. In the small winning game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a, the opening/closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 from then on will be inside the winning ball area. will enter. The game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, one game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 is detected by the V winning switch 87a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a.

When the total number of balls detected by the V judgment winning switch 87a and the V judgment winning switch 15a reaches 10, the V judgment winning device 87, which is opened in the small winning game state, closes its operating port and the game ball enters. considered to be an impossible situation. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge at the bottom, and the gaming balls that have passed through the merged discharge passage and entered the V judgment winning device 87 are placed in a predetermined position inside the game board 2. It is discharged into the discharge channel. The discharge path is provided with a V judgment discharge switch 15b that can detect the game balls to be discharged, and all the game balls to be discharged are detected by the switch.

When a small hit occurs and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, a game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a during a predetermined valid period. , the conditions for generating a jackpot are satisfied, and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The winning of a game ball in such a V winning area 870 is called a V winning. In the pachinko game machine 1, as mentioned above, during the period when a small hit occurs and the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, a total of about 10 game balls can be collected on average without requiring any special operation. The structure and control design are such that the game ball can enter the V judgment winning device 87, and furthermore, when the game ball can enter the V judgment winning device 87, the game ball is always (100%) in the V winning area. The structure is designed to enter 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small hit occurs, a right-hitting promotion notification that instructs the player to hit the right-hand ball is executed so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V judgment winning device 87. Ru.

Therefore, when a small hit occurs, unless the player does not shoot the game ball during the opening period of the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87, and unless the player hits the ball left-handed, the player must hit right-handed. In this case, the game ball will definitely (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a jackpot will occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example was shown in which the V judgment winning device 87 was provided with a structure for decelerating the game ball. However, such a deceleration structure is not provided, and an operating port that allows the game ball to fall is provided in a part of the guide path for the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, and during the period of the small hit game state. In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration may be used in which the operating port is opened 10 times.

In the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V judgment winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to cause a game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the V judgment winning device 87, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that it may be arranged so that there is a possibility that the game balls hit into the left gaming area may enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V judgment winning device 87, but from the viewpoint of playability, It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls that are distributed into the right game area will enter them.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the gaming area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, a game ball hit to the right is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. Further, the special variable prize winning ball device 7 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area depending on the state of the game nails.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a big winning opening covered by a rectangular door on the front, and when a jackpot occurs, the door is tilted forward about the bottom by a solenoid, and the big winning opening appears ( open). A count switch 23 is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 to detect the game ball that has entered. A winning route is set to the special variable winning ball device 7 using a game nail or other structure so that the game ball can enter the grand prize opening only when the game ball is hit into the right game area. Limited. It should be noted that it may be arranged so that a prize can be won in the big winning hole regardless of whether the game ball is hit in either the left game area or the right game area.

A jackpot occurs when a jackpot symbol (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, and when a jackpot symbol (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Occurs in When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on the game ball winning in the first starting winning hole, the jackpot symbol is drawn and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on the game ball winning in the second starting winning hole, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B.

A jackpot also occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 while the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is open due to the small winning gaming state. Hereinafter, the game ball entering the V winning area 870 and being detected by the V winning switch 87a will be referred to as a V winning. A small win is a win in which the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value imparting, and a jackpot can occur on the condition of a V winning. In the V judgment winning device 87, a gaming state in which the operating port is opened is called a "small winning gaming state." Then, in the small hit game state, a jackpot that occurs based on the game ball winning a V prize is called a "jackpot via a small win." On the other hand, a jackpot gaming state based on the display result of the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is referred to as "jackpot by special symbol".

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous for the player as a predetermined value imparting, and a repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 repeats the open state and the closed state a predetermined number of times. In the repeated continuous control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is open (the big winning hole is open) is called a round. Repeated continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, after the special variable prize winning ball device 7 is set to the open state, a predetermined end condition of the open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 The closed state is established in response to the fulfillment of the opening termination condition (that is, the occurrence of winning balls). Then, when the release end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of openings in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (final round).

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed when the first starting condition (first execution condition) or the second starting condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, when the game ball After passing (including winning) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole as the starting winning area, the start condition for the variable display (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is started based on the establishment of a state in which a jackpot game is not being executed and a jackpot game is not being executed, and when a variable display time (variable time) has elapsed, a display result (stopped pattern) is derived and displayed. Note that the game ball passing through means that the game ball has passed through an area that has been predetermined as a winning area, such as a winning opening or gate, and is a concept that includes the game ball entering the winning opening (winning a prize). It is. Further, deriving and displaying the display result means to finally stop and display the symbol (an example of identification information) (determined display).

In addition, regarding the variable display in which the starting conditions have not yet been met even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole, if the game ball has not yet started within the predetermined upper limit number. Storing information regarding variable displays for which conditions are not met is called pending storage. The term "suspended storage" is also used to indicate (specify) information that has been stored. Pending memory is also called starting memory or starting winnings memory.

Regarding the first special symbol, a variable display is executed based on the first pending memory as a pending memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole. Regarding the second special symbol, a variable display is executed based on the second pending memory as a pending memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole. If a jackpot occurs in a state where such first pending memory or second pending memory exists, the pending memory that existed before the jackpot occurrence will be maintained as it is, and the variable display will be displayed after the jackpot gaming state ends. used for.

When a second starting prize enters the second starting winning hole, even if there is a pending memory of the first starting winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second starting winning will be executed with priority. Ru. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is a second reserve consisting of four displays that display the number of valid winning balls that entered the second starting winning hole, that is, the number of second reserve memories. A display 25B is provided. The second hold indicator 25B increases the number of indicators lit by one each time there is a valid starting prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 4B is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further above the second reservation display 25B, a first reservation display 25A is provided which is made up of four indicators that display the effective number of winning balls that have entered the first starting prize opening, that is, the number of first reservation memories. . The first hold indicator 25A increases the number of indicators lit by one each time there is a valid starting prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 4A is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

In the pachinko game machine 1, depending on the game situation, the player shoots the game ball in two ways: ``left-handed'' aiming at the left playing area, and ``right-handed hitting'' aiming at the right playing area. The game state and performance state are controlled so that a rich variety of games can be enjoyed. Below, the flow of the game after the player starts playing the game on the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

When a player takes a seat at the pachinko game machine 1 and starts playing the game for the first time, the player first plays the game so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening by hitting the ball to the left. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and if the display result is a jackpot (a jackpot due to the special symbol), the user switches from left-handed batting to right-handed batting and plays the game aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 that is released. . After the jackpot game state ends, right-handed promotion notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to urge the player to play the game by hitting right. Specifically, a message such as "Aim to the right" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

During the jackpot game state, a game is performed in which the player aims at the opened special variable winning ball device 7 by hitting the ball with the right hand. During the jackpot game state, right-handed hitting promotion notification is performed. After the jackpot game state ends, if the time saving state described later is reached, the player continues playing the game by hitting right. After the jackpot game is over, if the time saving state has been reached, a time saving notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the time saving state will start. Further, during the time saving state, a right-handed hitting promotion notification is also performed. If the time-saving state does not occur after the end of the jackpot game state, the right-hand hitting promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state ends, and the game ball switches from right-hand hitting to left-hand hitting and enters the first starting prize opening. Play the game as follows. In addition, if the time saving state does not occur, a left-handed playing promotion notification (also called left-handed playing notification) is made to be performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to urge the player to switch back to left-handed playing and play the game. It's okay.

During the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, the player plays the game by hitting the right hand to aim at the variable winning ball device 6B having the second starting winning hole. When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole and the display result becomes a jackpot (jackpot due to a special symbol), the player plays the game by aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while hitting the right hand. In addition, if the game ball enters the second starting prize opening and the display result becomes a small hit display result, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 will be opened in the small winning gaming state, so the V judgment will be made while hitting the right hand. Aim for the winning device 87 and play the game. At the start of the small winning game state, a small winning start notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning gaming state is started. In addition, when controlled to a small winning gaming state, a specific timing (depending on the gaming situation, the start timing of the small winning display that is executed before the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened according to the small winning) , or at a predetermined timing before the small win display is executed.), a right-handed hitting promotion notification is also performed.

When the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is in an open state due to the small winning gaming state, the game ball falls from the operating port into the inside of the V judgment winning device 87, enters the V winning region 870, and is detected. When a V-win occurs, a jackpot via a small hit occurs. When a V winning prize occurs, a V winning notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V winning prize has occurred. Further, when the small winning gaming state ends, a small winning ending notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning gaming state has ended. Then, after the small hit ends, the special variable winning ball device 7 is released in the jackpot game state, so the player plays the game by aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while hitting right.

In addition, when playing a game aiming at the V judgment winning device 87 in the small winning gaming state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 but enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, the jackpot will occur. does not occur. In this way, when a V winning does not occur during the small winning game state, a V winning failure notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the V winning has failed. Furthermore, at the end of the small winning gaming state, a small winning ending notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning gaming state has ended. Then, after the small winning game state ends, while the time saving state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable prize winning ball device 6B while hitting right. When the time saving state ends, the player switches from right-handed to left-handed and plays the game so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening. At the end of the time saving state, time saving end notification to notify that the time saving has ended is performed on the screen of the image display device 5, and left-handed playing promotion notification to urge the player to return to left-handed playing and play the game.

FIG. 8-2 is a diagram showing a hit type table. The winning type table shows, for each type of winning, the conditions for generating a jackpot, the control state (gaming state) after the jackpot, the number of openings in the jackpot (number of rounds), and the opening time of each round in the jackpot. In this embodiment, the jackpot types are symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, and 5 (4 )R Time-saving jackpot is provided. The number in parentheses of the jackpot via the small hit indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 is released.

A small hit occurs when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. A determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol should be made into a small hit symbol is made in advance by random number lottery (small win determination of special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in an opening pattern in which the number of openings is 10 times and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. The game control state (jackpot probability, small win probability, base, which will be described later) after the end of the small win game state is the same as before the small win. In a small win, a prize ball is paid out to a game ball that has won a prize in the V winning area 870 in the V judgment winning device 87 during the small winning game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that about 30 winning balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

If a game ball is entered into the operating port while the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is open and the game ball enters the V winning area 870 inside the V judgment winning device 87 (V winning), a jackpot occurs. do. A jackpot via such a small hit is called a jackpot via a small hit. Jackpots via small hits include 16 (15) R time-saving jackpots via small hits, 9 (8) R time-saving jackpots via small hits, and 5 (4) R time-saving jackpots via small hits, which have different numbers of rounds in the jackpot. It will be done. 16(15)R A small win that is linked so that it can become a time-saving jackpot is called a first small win. 9(8)R A small win that is linked so that it can become a time-saving jackpot is called a second small win. 5(4)R A small win that is linked so that it can become a time-saving jackpot is called a third small win.

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly due to the variable display of special symbols without going through a small hit is called a symbol jackpot. The symbol jackpots include a symbol 15R time-saving jackpot and a symbol 4R time-saving jackpot that occur directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, a jackpot occurs due to a symbol jackpot that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a V prize via a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol. This includes small wins and jackpots. Each of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via small hit is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and is named a time-saving jackpot. The advantageous state advantageous for the player in this embodiment includes opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

The symbol 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 15 times (15R). The symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened four times (4R). For the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 15 times (15R) with the condition of winning a V prize. This is a jackpot, and the winning device opens for 16 rounds, but the actual number of openings of the jackpot is 15 times, and the player can win the same jackpot as the symbol 15R time-saving jackpot when opening the jackpot. I feel like it's a type. Via small hit 9 (8) R Time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 8 times (8R) with the condition of V winning. It is. Via small hit 5 (4) R Time-saving jackpot: After the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 4 times (4R) with the condition of winning a V prize. This is a jackpot, and the winning device opens for 5 rounds, but the actual number of openings of the jackpot is 4 times, and the player can win the same jackpot as the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot when opening the jackpot. I feel like it's a type.

Symbol 4R Time Saving The time saving state after the jackpot has two conditions: the second special symbol is displayed 1 time, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed 5 times. Two end states are set: The number of times of the time-saving ending condition that the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once is determined by taking into account that the game balls that enter the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the ending condition that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once is that when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a probability of generating a jackpot via a small hit at a rate of about 1/7. It is assumed that there is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving ending condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is one time is set for the following reason. In the case of symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, basically the time-saving state (including electric support state) continues until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to display the second special symbol in a variable manner, It is necessary to hit the game ball to the right and enter the passage gate 41 to open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, such a variable winning ball device It takes time to place the game ball in 6B, and the first special symbol that has been stored on hold may be displayed in a variable manner first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed fluctuating is 5 times is that the jackpot can be achieved immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the condition for starting the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is satisfied. 1 of the 2nd special symbols that are likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player even if the variable display of the 1st special symbol is started due to the reserved memory based on the 1st starting winning that can be memorized at most 4 before the game state This is a condition for making it possible to reliably display batch fluctuations. By doing this, the fluctuating display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first starting winning starts immediately after the start of the time saving state, which makes it easier to determine a jackpot that is advantageous for the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from not being performed.

After a jackpot other than the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the end condition is that the second special symbol is displayed 7 times, and the total number of times that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is 11. Two end states are set: The number of times of seven times as the end condition of the time saving state is set considering that the game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of variable displays of the second special symbol is 7 times is that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a possibility that a jackpot via a small hit will occur compared to the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot. This is the number of times that the number of cases becomes significantly higher. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 is such that the jackpot occurs immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol starts due to the reserved memory based on the first starting winning that can be memorized at most 4 before the game state, the second special symbol 7 is likely to be determined as a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. This is to ensure that the display of changes in the number of times of changes can be executed reliably. By doing this, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first starting winning starts immediately after the start of the time saving state, which makes it easier to determine a jackpot that is advantageous for the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In this embodiment, in the low base state which is the normal state, the first starting prize opening is provided so that winnings can be won from the first route, so if the game ball flows down the first route, it will be easier to win from the second route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winnings than when the game ball flows down the path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second route, so the game ball flowing down the second route is better than the first route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a jackpot than if the game ball were to fall. In addition, in a specific state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second route, so that the game ball flowing down the second route is better than the first route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a jackpot than when the game ball flows down.

In addition, the comparison is not limited to such advantages, and for example, other winning openings (for example, another variable winning opening (which may be for starting winnings or non-starting winnings)) are compared to the first route. and the second route, and in the low base state which is the normal state, the first route is easier to win the variable winning hole than the second route, and in the high base state, jackpot game state, and small In other states such as a winning game state, it is easier to win the variable winning slot on the second route than on the first route. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player if the game medium flows down, and in other gaming states, it is advantageous for the player if the game medium flows down the second route.

FIG. 8-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 8-3, the type of random number, update range, purpose, and addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: This is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot and whether or not to win a small hit. Random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0 to 65535 which is the upper limit, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1: Jackpot type (type, symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, via small hit 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot, via small hit 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot, and via small hit 5 (4) Determine (any type of R time-saving jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2: Determine the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the type of fluctuation pattern). (4) Random 3: Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5: Determine the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the jackpots in the specific gaming state include symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, and small hit. It includes multiple types of via 5(4)R time-saving jackpots. Therefore, when a jackpot is determined based on the value of the random number for determining a hit (random R), or when a determination is made as a small hit, based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 1). Then, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a jackpot via a small hit, if a V-win does not occur, the determined jackpot will be invalidated. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, Random 1 is also a random number for determining the jackpot symbol. Furthermore, when the type of small win is determined, the small win symbol is determined at the same time. Therefore, Random 1 is also a random number for determining small winning symbols.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined by first determining the fluctuation pattern type using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and using the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3), This fluctuation pattern is determined. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of their variation modes. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that does not involve a reach, and a reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that involves a reach.

FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure hit determination table, a second special figure hit determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special symbol hit determination table. The first special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-4(A) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot.

The jackpot probability of the first special symbol differs depending on the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the jackpot probability is high in the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

FIG. 8-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special symbol hit determination table. The second special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot and a small hit for the second special symbol, and a jackpot determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R are set. This is the table where The upper part of FIG. 8-4(B) is the jackpot determination table part, and the lower part of FIG. 8-4(B) is the small hit determination table part. The "probability" shown in the upper part of Figure 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot.The "probability" shown in the lower part of Figure 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (proportion) of winning a small hit. .

The jackpot probability of the second special symbol differs depending on the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the jackpot probability is high in the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. On the other hand, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the setting value. Note that a small win may be provided in the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable that the probability of winning a small hit is lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability due to the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a starting prize in the first starting winning hole (first starting winning) or a starting winning in the second starting winning hole (second starting winning), the CPU 103 activates the random number circuit 124 at a predetermined timing. Extract the count value (random R). For the first starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the first special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, a jackpot is awarded for the first special symbol. decided on. Regarding the second starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the second special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, a jackpot is awarded for the second special symbol. decided on. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the second special figure hit judgment table, and the extracted value is matched with any of the small hit judgment values. If they match, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small hit. Deciding to make a small win also means making a tentative decision to make a jackpot via a small win (this is written as a tentative decision because it will not be controlled by a jackpot unless a V win occurs during the small win). .

In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to shift to a jackpot gaming state, but if the stop symbol by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed to a jackpot symbol. It also means deciding whether or not to do so. Also, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to shift to a small winning gaming state or not, but whether to make the stop symbol by the fluctuating display of the second special symbol a small winning symbol or not. It also means deciding whether or not to do so.

FIGS. 8-4(C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. 8-4(C) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 8-4(D) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol.

The first special jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4(C) contains numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, including "Symbol 15R time-saving jackpot" and "Symbol 4R time-saving jackpot". A jackpot judgment value corresponding to each of these is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8-4(D), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "symbol 15R time-saving jackpot" which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1 is set.

In addition, as shown in Figures 8-4(C) and (D), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) for determining the jackpot pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It will be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "8R time-saving jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "15R time-saving jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "7".

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 1 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

The jackpot type determination table via small hit in Figure 8-4 (E) contains numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, including "16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit" and " Jackpot determination values corresponding to each of "9(8)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" and "5(4)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" are set. However, the jackpot types determined by the jackpot type determination table via small hit are the 1st small hit (16 (15) R time-saving jackpot), the 2nd small hit (9 (8) R time-saving jackpot) This is a provisional jackpot type linked to each of the 3rd small win (5(4)R time-saving jackpot), and is invalidated if a V win does not occur in the small win gaming state.

FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the production control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. In FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, the relationship between specific command data for the production control command, the name of the command, and the specified contents of the command is shown. In the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, various performance control commands are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 according to the game control state.

The main commands in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6 will be explained. Command 80XX(H) is a production control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponds to variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. Moreover, the production control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, upon receiving the command 80XX(H), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance display device to start a performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol.

Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result designation commands that indicate display results including loss display results, jackpot display results for each jackpot type, small win type, and small win display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start varying display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first and second special symbols.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are win start designation commands that designate the start of a jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot.

The command A1XX(H) is a command for specifying the opening of the big winning hole, which indicates that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX(H) is a designation command after the opening of the big winning hole which indicates the opening (closure) of the big winning hole of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are win end designation commands that designate the end of the jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot.

Command A401 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command A402 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the normal state (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time saving state designation command that specifies that the gaming state is the first time saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time saving state designation command that specifies that the gaming state is the second time saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies the first pending storage number. "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first pending storage number. Command C1XX(H) is a second pending storage number designation command that specifies the second pending storage number. "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the second pending storage number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when subtracting the number of pending memories, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a pending memory number designation command that specifies the number of pending memories after subtraction; however, the present invention is not limited to this. For each of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories, a pending storage number subtraction designation command may be used to specify that the number of pending memories is to be subtracted by one.

Command C2XX (H) and command C3XX (H) display the contents of the winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, fluctuation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole. This is the production control command shown. Among these, the command C2XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot, whether or not it will be a small hit, and the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates the judgment result (variation pattern type judgment result) in which judgment value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type judgment falls within among the winning judgment results. It is.

Command C401 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small winning. Command C402 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small win. Command C403 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small win. Command C501 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small winning. Command C502 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small win. Command C503 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small win. Command C601 (H) is a V winning designation command that designates that there is a V winning. Command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection designation command that specifies that a winning ball (including both a V winning ball and a winning ball other than the V winning ball) has been detected entering the V judgment winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102 is provided with a first reservation storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the first special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first pending storage number is secured in the first pending storage buffer. The first pending storage buffer contains a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number. , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

Regarding the second special symbol, the RAM 102 is provided with a second pending storage buffer for storing pending storage information of the second special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the second pending storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second pending storage buffer. The second pending storage buffer contains a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number. , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

Based on the winning in the first starting winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saves them in a storage area in the first holding storage buffer. Execute the process to (storage). Specifically, these random numerical values are extracted and saved (stored) in the first holding storage buffer based on the winning in the first starting winning opening. In addition, based on the winning in the second starting winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the second holding storage buffer. Execute the process to save (storage) to. Specifically, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the second holding storage buffer based on the winning in the second starting winning opening.

Storing information regarding the starting winnings in the pending storage buffer in this manner may be referred to as "being stored pending storage." In addition, the random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2) and the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the reservation memory buffer in advance, but are extracted at the time when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. It may be extracted.

FIG. 8-7 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passing process executed as part of the process in S101. In the starting port switch passage process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the first starting port switch 22A is in the on state (S1211). If the first starting port switch 22A is not in the on state, the process moves to S1221. If the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of first pending memories has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first pending memory for counting the number of first pending memories). It is confirmed whether the value of the number counter is 4 (S1212). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit, the process moves to S1221.

If the first pending memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first pending memory counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the first reservation storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted, Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process that determines in advance the variation display result and variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected first special symbol's starting winning is subsequently executed at the starting winning (S1215).

In this embodiment, after a starting prize is generated in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole, and various data obtained at the time of the starting winning is stored as pending storage information, the start conditions for the variable display are set. If established, at the timing of starting the variable display, in the special symbol normal processing (S110), the variable display result is determined for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) for which the variable display is to be started based on the relevant pending storage information. The determination as to whether or not to be displayed as a jackpot display result and the jackpot type are determined based on the jackpot determination value and the jackpot type determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. Then, in the fluctuation pattern setting process (S111), the fluctuation pattern (including the determination of the fluctuation pattern type) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type determination value and the fluctuation pattern determination value set corresponding to the various random values described above. Based on.

On the other hand, apart from such a determination, the timing before the variable display starts based on the starting winnings in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole, specifically, the timing when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole. Or, at the timing when a starting prize is won in the second starting prize opening (the timing at which the pending memory information is stored), the pending memory information that stores various data obtained at the time of the starting prize is pre-read, and based on the pre-read pending memory information. In this way, the determination of whether or not it will be a jackpot, the determination of whether or not it will be a small hit, the type of jackpot, and the type of fluctuation pattern are performed in advance by a jackpot set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. A winning presentation process is executed to pre-read and determine based on the determination value, the jackpot type determination value, and the fluctuation pattern type determination value. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 predicts the fluctuating display result in advance before the fluctuating display of the performance symbols is executed, and based on the various determination results at the start winning time, the fluctuating display of the performance symbols It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a look-ahead notice that foretells that there will be a jackpot (possibility of a jackpot).

Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning performance process (S1216), and performs control to transmit a variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1216). S1217). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first starting prize designation command to the production control CPU 120 (S1218), and sets the value of the first pending memory number counter to EXT data to send the first pending memory number designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the performance control CPU 120 (S1219).

By executing the processes of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, the first Every time a starting prize is entered in the starting winning hole, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are surely transmitted to the performance control CPU 120.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when a starting prize is generated in the first starting winning hole, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first starting winning designation command, and the A set of four commands, including the first pending storage number designation command, is transmitted all at once within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the second starting port switch 22B is in the on state (S1221). If the second starting port switch 22B is not in the on state, the process ends. If the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the number of second pending memories has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending memory for counting the number of second pending memories). It is checked whether the value of the number counter is 4 (S1222). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is immediately terminated.

If the second pending memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second pending memory counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the second reservation storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted, Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process similar to the winning performance process described in S1215 regarding the starting winning of the detected second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning performance process (S1226), and performs control to transmit a variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1227). ). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second starting prize designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1228), and sets the value of the second pending memory number counter to EXT data to send the second pending memory number designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the performance control CPU 120 (S1229).

By executing the processes of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, the second Every time a starting prize is entered in the starting winning hole, both a symbol designation command and a variation type command are always transmitted to the performance control CPU 120.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when a starting prize to the second starting winning hole occurs, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a second starting winning designation command, A set of four commands, including the second pending storage number designation command, is transmitted all at once within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal processing (S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 checks whether there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

If there is no pending storage data in the pending storage buffer in S51, processing for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command (S80) is performed, and then the processing ends. On the other hand, when there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer in S51, the CPU 103 checks whether there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer (S52). If there is pending memory data in the second pending memory buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A will be displayed depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 4A based on the pending memory data stored in the first pending memory buffer. be exposed. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 4B based on the pending memory data stored in the second pending memory buffer. will be held.

Through the control of S52 to S54, if even one data of the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 4B based on the data of the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 4A based on the data in the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. Store it in the random number buffer of RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of the storage area in the second pending storage buffer are erased.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this. Additionally, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second reserved memory number are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this.

Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command for specifying the number of reserved memories indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (S59 ). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

In the special symbol normal processing, first, data indicating "1st" indicating that the processing is to be executed targeting the first starting winning hole, that is, "1st" indicating that the processing is to be executed targeting the first special symbol. , or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed targeting the second starting prize opening, that is, data indicating "second" indicating executing the process targeting the second special symbol. , is set to the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the same can be used for both the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random number extracted in S1214 of the starting port switch passing process or S1224 of the starting port switch passing process and stored in the pending storage buffer or the random number buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value or small hit determination value with a random number for jackpot determination, and if they match, executes a process of determining a jackpot or small hit. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process and a small hit determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, if the first special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in Figure 8-4 (A), the second special symbol will match any of the jackpot determination values shown in Figure 8-4 (B). If it matches the judgment value, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in S61), the process moves to S71. Determining whether or not to make it a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped symbol on the special symbol display a jackpot symbol. .

If it is determined in S61 that it is a jackpot (Y in S61), a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8-4(C) is selected (S73), and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer does not indicate "first" (indicates "second"), select the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in Figure 8-4 (D) (S74). , proceed to S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is set as the jackpot type. It is determined (S75), and the process proceeds to S81.

In addition, if the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) does not match any jackpot determination value in S61 (N in S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is the data indicating "second". By checking whether or not there is, it is checked whether the jackpot determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). When the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not data indicating "second" (it is a variable display of the first special symbol), the process advances to S82, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (fluctuating display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol in Figure 8-4 (B) Using the determination table, a small hit determination process is performed by determining whether or not the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values (S77). That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 8-4 (B) (Y in S77), it is decided that the second special symbol will be a small hit. do. If it is determined to be a small win (S77Y), a small win flag indicating that it is a small win is set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, select the small hit via jackpot type determination table in Figure 8-4 (E) (S79), and select the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area. The jackpot type corresponding to the value matching is determined as the jackpot type via small hit (S80). Then, the process moves to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), the process moves to S82, which will be described later.

In S81, data indicating the type of jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, when the jackpot type is "symbol 15R time-saving jackpot", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "symbol 4R time-saving jackpot", data indicating the jackpot type "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit", "03" is set in a temporary jackpot type buffer different from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a small hit via 9(8)R time-saving jackpot, "04" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a small hit via 5(4)R time-saving jackpot, "05" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. Among these, the data indicating 16 (15) R time saving jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R time saving jackpot via small hit, and 5 (4) R time saving jackpot via small hit are V winnings in the small winning gaming state. If this does not occur, the jackpot will not occur and there will be invalid data, which will be provisionally set.

In S82, a stop symbol of the special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is a losing symbol, is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. If the small hit flag is set, one of "1", "5", and "9", which is a small winning symbol according to the small winning type selected and determined in S80, is determined as the special symbol stopping symbol. do. If the jackpot flag is set, either "3" or "7", which is a jackpot symbol according to the jackpot type selected and determined in S75, is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

FIG. 8-9 is a flowchart showing the small win release preprocessing (S118). In the small winning opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 operates the movable part 872 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the opening mode of the small winning, and starts the opening operation of the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 ( S411). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a small winning start designation command indicating that a small winning game state is started to the performance control CPU 120 (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets a V judgment winning number counter as a counting means in order to use the number of winnings in the V winning area 870 in the small winning open state as the condition for ending the open state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V judgment prize winning number counter is set to "10", and settings are made to count down the number of V winning prizes. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S119) (S414).

FIG. 8-10 is a flowchart showing the small hit opening process (S119) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit release process, the CPU 103 updates the small hit release control timer by -1 (S430). Next, in S435, which will be described later, it is checked whether the count value of the V judgment winnings counter that counts the number of V winnings is "0" (S431). The V judgment winning balls counter is set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 8-9, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the counted value becomes "0". When the count value of the V judgment winning prize counter is "0" in S430, the process advances to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is checked whether the small hit release control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

When the small hit release control timer has timed out in S432, the process advances to S441. On the other hand, when the small hit release control timer has not timed out in S432, the movable part 872 is brought into the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 in accordance with the timed value of the small win release control timer based on the opening mode of the small win. A process for opening and closing the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is performed (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether or not a V winning that occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 which is in an open state inside the V judgment winning device 87 from the V winning opening is detected, It is determined whether the switch 87a is in the on state (S434). When it is in the ON state in S434, it means that a V winning prize is detected, and a V winning flag that is set when a V winning prize is detected is set (S435). Then, processing for transmitting a V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). Thereby, the production control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning balls have been detected, and can recognize the number of V winning balls. Next, the opening/closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning hole in the V winning area 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 wins a V-win, the V-winning opening in the V-winning area 870 is closed, and after that, the game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 All the balls are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, when it is not in the on state in S434, it is the time when the V winning prize is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V judgment winning switch 15a is in the on state (S438). If it is in the on state in S438, the process advances to S439, and if it is not in the on state in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V judgment winning ball counter set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 8-9 is down-counted by "-1" (S439), and a V judgment winning ball detection designation command is sent. The following processing is performed (S440). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning ball that has entered the judgment winning device 87 has been detected after the V winning ball has been detected, and the game that has entered the judgment winning device 87 It becomes possible to recognize the number of balls.

When the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter is "0" in S431, it is the time when the small winning opening end condition is satisfied because the small winning V winning number reaches the upper limit value, and, When the small win release control timer times out in S432, the small win release control is completed and the small win release end condition is satisfied. At these times, the CPU 103 operates the movable part 872 to the closed state by controlling the solenoid 22, and closes the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V judgment prize winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the opening mode of the small winning, the count value of the V judgment winning prize number counter becomes "0". The V judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small win release control timer times out, the V judgment winning device 87 is closed in accordance with the end of the small win release control in the small win release mode.

Next, data corresponding to a specific period that is the V winning valid period after the V judgment winning device 87 is closed is set in the V winning valid period timer (S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small hit end process (S442). The value is updated to the value corresponding to step S120) (S443), and the process ends. As a result, time measurement for a specific period, which is the V winning valid period after the V judgment winning device 87 is closed, is started. In addition, by setting the specific period that is the V winning prize validity period in this way, even if the game ball passes through the V winning prize area later than the normal time for some reason, the game ball can be detected. Further, since a specific period is set, even if someone attempts to enter the V winning area illegally, only that period will be detected, so fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 8-11 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (S120) in the special symbol process process. In the small winning post-end processing, the CPU 103 updates the V winning prize validity period timer by -1 (S441), and checks whether the V winning prize validity period timer has timed out (timer value=0) (S442).

If the V winning valid period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether the V winning flag set in S434 or S445 when a V winning is already detected has been set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a It is determined whether or not it is in the on state (S444). If it is not in the on state in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the ON state in S444, it means that a V winning is detected during the V winning valid period, and a V winning flag indicating that a V winning is detected is set (S445). Then, processing for transmitting the V winning prize designation command is performed (S446), and the processing ends. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that a V winning prize has occurred.

When the V prize validity period timer has timed out in S442, a process for transmitting a small winning end designation command is performed (S447). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the small hit has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening/closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that it is a jackpot, and the jackpot flag is set (S449).

As mentioned above, in the small winning game state, if you play right-handed in accordance with the right-handed hitting promotion notification described later, you can make the game ball enter the V judgment winning device 87 with approximately 100% probability, and you will receive a V judgment winning prize. Based on the fact that the game ball that enters the device 87 always makes a V win in the V win area 870, the V win flag is set with approximately 100% probability (S435 in FIG. 8-10). A jackpot flag is set and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

Next, the CPU 103 stores the data indicating the jackpot type via small win stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 in response to the fact that it is determined that the jackpot is officially won due to the occurrence of the V winning. is formally stored (S450). Then, the time saving flag that was set at that point is once reset (S451).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command, jackpot start 4 designation command, or jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the jackpot game state has started. Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot control timer (S453).

Also, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, depending on the type of jackpot, the number of openings (for example, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval. Open pattern data indicating the opening mode such as time (big winning opening closing time between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 102 (S454). Among such data, data on the number of openings is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (S114) (S455), and the process ends. As a result, when a V winning occurs in the small winning gaming state, the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the jackpot game state will not occur, so the data indicating the jackpot type via small win stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), and the special symbol process flag is The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (S457), and the process ends. As a result, when a V win does not occur in the small winning gaming state, the state does not shift to the jackpot gaming state.

[Explanation regarding characteristic part 09TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 09TM will be explained using FIGS. 9-1 to 9-28.
In this embodiment, in a variable display where the display result is a "jackpot" when controlled to a low base state (normal state), a combination of decorative symbols for a jackpot (for example, "333" etc.) can be displayed.
In addition, in this embodiment, in a variable display where the display result is a "small win" when controlled to a high base state (time saving state), a combination of decorative symbols for a small win is used as a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed. combinations (such as "3V3")) can be displayed.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the control is in a high base state (time saving state), the game medium (game ball) is When the machine is controlled to a low base state (normal state) without entering the V winning area, a combination of decorative symbols for a jackpot (such as "333") can be displayed as a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed.

[Board composition]
FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment.
As shown in Figure 9-1, this is a device for determining the V winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a jackpot when the small hit shown in Figure 8-1 occurs, and is made of a transparent member. The V-judgment winning device 87, which is a device formed of The configuration is such that it is possible to perform a promotional blinking effect in which the LED 87L of the V winning prize determination device blinks (lights up) in the middle). Note that description of the same parts as in FIG. 8-1 will be omitted.

In this embodiment, a plurality of different presentation modes are provided as modes of the promotional flashing presentation. For example, there is a first promotional flashing effect in which the V winning determination device LED 87L flashes in rainbow colors at a 0.5 second flashing cycle, and a second promotional flashing performance in which the V winning prize determining device LED 87L flashes in red at a 2 second flashing cycle. There are several presentation modes (see Figures 9-14 and 9-15, which will be described later).

[Jackpot type table]
FIG. 9-2 is a diagram showing a jackpot type table. The jackpot type table includes, for each type of jackpot, the jackpot occurrence conditions, the control state after the jackpot (playing state), the number of openings in the jackpot (number of rounds), the opening time of each round in the jackpot, and the jackpot ending period (hereinafter referred to as appropriate). ), and a small winning ending period (hereinafter appropriately referred to as the "small winning ED period"). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are symbol 10R time-saving jackpot, symbol 3R time-saving jackpot, 11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, 6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, and 4 (3 )R Time-saving jackpot is provided. The number in parentheses of the jackpot via the small hit indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 is released.

A small hit occurs when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. A determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol should be made into a small hit symbol is made in advance by random number lottery (small win determination of special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in an opening pattern in which the number of openings is 10 times and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. The game control state (jackpot probability, small win probability, base, which will be described later) after the end of the small win game state is the same as before the small win. In a small win, a prize ball is paid out to a game ball that has won a prize in the V winning area 870 in the V judgment winning device 87 during the small winning game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that prize balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

If a game ball is entered into the operating port while the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is open and the game ball enters the V winning area 870 inside the V judgment winning device 87 (V winning), a jackpot occurs. do. A jackpot via such a small hit is called a jackpot via a small hit. For jackpots via small hits, the number of rounds in the jackpot is different: "11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small hit", "6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small hit", and "4 (3) via small hit". "R time-saving jackpot" is included.

In this example, the small win that is linked so that it can become the "11 (10) R time-saving jackpot" is called the "first small win." A small win that is linked so that it can become a "6(5)R time-saving jackpot" is called a "second small win." A small win that is linked so that it can become a "4(3)R time-saving jackpot" is called a "third small win."

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly due to the variable display of special symbols without going through a small hit is called a symbol jackpot. The symbol jackpots include a "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" which occur directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, a jackpot occurs due to a symbol jackpot that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a V prize via a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol. This includes small wins and jackpots. Each of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via small hit is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and is named a time-saving jackpot. The advantageous state advantageous for the player in this embodiment includes opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

The symbol 10R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened 10 times (10R). The symbol 3R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened three times (3R). For the 11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 10 times (10R) with the condition of winning a V prize. This is a jackpot, and the winning device opens for 11 rounds, but the actual number of times the jackpot is opened is 10 times, and the player has to enter the same jackpot type as the symbol 10R time-saving jackpot when opening the jackpot. I feel that. Via small hit 6 (5) R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 5 times (5R) with the condition of winning a V prize. It is. Via small hit 4 (3) R Time-saving jackpot: After the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 3 times (3R) with the condition of winning a V prize. This is a jackpot, and the winning device opens for 4 rounds, but the actual number of openings of the jackpot is 3 times, and the player has to enter the same jackpot type as the symbol 3R time-saving jackpot when opening the jackpot. I feel that.

Symbol 3R Time Saving The time saving state after the jackpot has two conditions: the second special symbol is displayed 1 time, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed 5 times. (not shown) are set. The number of times of the time-saving ending condition that the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once is determined by taking into account that the game balls that enter the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the ending condition that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once is that when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a probability of generating a jackpot via a small hit at a rate of about 1/7. It is assumed that there is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving ending condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is one time is set for the following reason. In the case of a symbol 3R time-saving jackpot, the time-saving state (including the electric support state) is basically continued until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to display the second special symbol in a variable manner, It is necessary to hit the game ball to the right and enter the passage gate 41 to open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, such a variable winning ball device It takes time to place the game ball in 6B, and the first special symbol that has been stored on hold may be displayed in a variable manner first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed fluctuating is 5 times is that the jackpot can be achieved immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the condition for starting the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is satisfied. 1 of the 2nd special symbols that are likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player even if the variable display of the 1st special symbol is started due to the reserved memory based on the 1st starting winning that can be memorized at most 4 before the game state This is a condition for making it possible to reliably display batch fluctuations. By doing this, the fluctuating display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first starting winning starts immediately after the start of the time saving state, which makes it easier to determine a jackpot that is advantageous for the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from not being performed.

In addition, after the jackpot with the symbol 10R time-saving jackpot and part of the 11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, the end condition is that the number of variable displays of the second special symbol is 99 times, and the first special symbol and the second Two ending conditions are set, including an ending condition (not shown) in which the total number of variable display times with the special symbol is 103 times. The number of times of 99 times as the end condition of the time saving state is set considering that the game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the ending condition that the number of variable displays of the second special symbol is 99 times is that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the next jackpot via the small hit is substantially determined. , compared to the symbol 3R time-saving jackpot, the number of times is set such that the possibility of generating a jackpot via a small hit is significantly higher. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win.

In addition, the ending condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 103 is that for the same reason as in the case of the symbol 3R time-saving jackpot, immediately after the start of the time-saving state, the second special symbol It is advantageous for the player even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started before the variable display start condition is met by the suspended memory based on the first starting winning that can be stored at a maximum of 4 before the jackpot game state. This is to ensure that the variable display of the 99 times of variation of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a big hit, can be executed.

In addition, after the jackpot of 11 (10) R time saving jackpot via small hit, 6 (5) R time saving jackpot via small hit, and 4 (3) R time saving jackpot via small hit, the second special symbol is Two ending conditions are set: one in which the number of variable displays is seven times, and one in which the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 (not shown). The number of times of seven times as the end condition of the time saving state is set considering that the game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of variable displays of the second special symbol is 7 times is that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a possibility that a jackpot via a small hit will occur compared to the symbol 3R time-saving jackpot. This is the number of times that the number of cases becomes significantly higher. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win.

In addition, the ending condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 is that for the same reason as in the case of the symbol 3R time-saving jackpot, immediately after the start of the time-saving state, the second special symbol It is advantageous for the player even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started before the variable display start condition is met by the suspended memory based on the first starting winning that can be stored at a maximum of 4 before the jackpot game state. This is to ensure that the display of the seven variations of the second special symbol, which is likely to result in a big hit, can be displayed.

10 seconds is set as the jackpot ending period (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "jackpot ED period") for the symbol 3R time-saving jackpot and the symbol 10R time-saving jackpot. During such a 10-second jackpot ED period, it is possible to execute a rush performance that suggests a performance mode that will be controlled after the jackpot.

In addition, the small winning ending period of 11 (10) R time saving jackpot via small winning, 6 (5) R time saving jackpot via small winning, and 4 (3) R time saving jackpot via small winning (hereinafter referred to as "small winning ED" as appropriate) (referred to as "period") is set to 5 seconds, and the jackpot ED period is set to 10 seconds. During such a 5-second small win ED period, it is possible to perform a jackpot type notification performance that notifies the jackpot type and a result display that displays information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of awarded prize balls. , During the 10-second jackpot ED period, it is possible to execute a rush performance that suggests a performance mode that will be controlled after the jackpot.

In this embodiment, in the low base state which is the normal state, the first starting prize opening is provided so that winnings can be won from the first route, so if the game ball flows down the first route, it will be easier to win from the second route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winnings than when the game ball flows down the path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second route, so the game ball flowing down the second route is better than the first route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a jackpot than if the game ball were to fall. In addition, in a special state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment prize winning device 87 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second route, so if the game ball flows down the second route, it is better to enter the first route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a jackpot than when the game ball flows down.

In addition, the comparison is not limited to such advantageousness, and for example, other winning openings (for example, another variable winning opening (which may be for starting winnings or non-starting winnings)) are the first. It is provided in the route and the second route, and in the low base state as the normal state, the first route is easier to win the variable winning hole than the second route, and in the high base state, jackpot game state, and In other states such as a small winning gaming state, it is easier to win the variable winning slot on the second route than on the first route, and from other viewpoints, the first route is used as the gaming medium in the normal state. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player if the game medium flows down the second route, and in other gaming states, it is advantageous for the player if the game medium flows down the second route.

[Random value]
FIG. 9-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-3, in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR2 for determining the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data representing each of MR3, a random number MR4 for determining a general figure display result, and a random number MR5 for determining an initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

Note that although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 9-3, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random numbers MR1 to The range from MR5 to MR5 may vary depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and variable display of each symbol in the variable display of special symbols, normal symbols, etc. A fluctuation pattern table and the like storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns serving as modes are stored.

[Display result judgment table]
FIGS. 9-4 (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol and a display result determination table for the second special symbol. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 9-4 (A1) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "[first special symbol] display result determination table"). The display result determination table [for the first special symbol] is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 is set. “Probability” shown in FIG. 9-4 (A1) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot.
In this example, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol is 1/199.

FIG. 9-4 (A2) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the second special symbol (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "[second special symbol] display result determination table"). [For the second special symbol] The display result determination table is a data table for making a jackpot determination and a small hit determination for the second special symbol, and includes a jackpot determination value that is compared with the random number MR1, and a small hit determination. This is a table in which values are set. In FIG. 9-4 (A2), the upper part is the jackpot determination table part, and the lower part is the small hit determination table part. The "probability" shown in the upper row indicates the probability (proportion) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower row indicates the probability (proportion) of a small hit.

In this example, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is 1/199. Further, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35. Note that a small win may be provided in the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable that the probability of winning a small hit is lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability due to the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a starting prize in the first starting winning hole (first starting winning) or a starting winning in the second starting winning hole (second starting winning), the CPU 103 activates the random number circuit 124 at a predetermined timing. The count value (random value MR1) is extracted. For the first starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the display result judgment table [for the first special symbol], and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the first special symbol is Decided to hit the jackpot. For the second starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the display result judgment table [for the second special symbol], and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the second special symbol is Decided to hit the jackpot. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the display result judgment table [for the second special symbol], and if the extracted value does not match any of the small hit judgment values. If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small hit. Deciding to make a small win also means making a tentative decision to make a jackpot via a small win (described as a tentative decision because it will not be controlled by a jackpot unless a V win occurs during a small win). .

In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to shift to a jackpot gaming state, but if the stop symbol by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed to a jackpot symbol. It also means deciding whether or not to do so. Also, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to shift to a small winning gaming state or not, but whether to make the stop symbol by the fluctuating display of the second special symbol a small winning symbol or not. It also means deciding whether or not to do so.

[Jackpot type determination table]
FIGS. 9-4 (B1), (B2-1), and (B2-2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. 9-4 (B1) is a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 9-4 (B2-1) is a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol. Figure 9-4 (B2-2) is a small hit via small hit jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of a small hit via small hit when a small hit is determined by the second special symbol. It is.

The jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "[first special symbol] jackpot type determination table") in FIG. 9-4 (B1) includes a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. A numerical value to be compared with the value, and a jackpot determination value corresponding to each of "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" is set.

In addition, FIG. 9-4 (B1) also shows the number of times the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot corresponding to each of the "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot". "Symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" has a time-saving control number of 99 times, and "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" has a time-saving control number of one time. Hereinafter, the symbol 10R time-saving jackpot for which the number of time-saving controls is 99 times will be appropriately referred to as "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot (99 times)", and the symbol 3R time-saving jackpot for which the number of time-saving controls is 1 will be appropriately referred to as "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot (1 times).

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol], out of the range of determination values for MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 2 are assigned to "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" (3%). , 3 to 299 are assigned to "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" (97%).

The jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol in FIG. 9-4 (B2-1) (hereinafter referred to as the "[second special symbol] jackpot type determination table") includes random numbers for determining the jackpot type. A numerical value to be compared with the value of MR2, and a jackpot determination value corresponding to "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" is set.

In this example, in the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table, out of the range of determination values for MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 299 are assigned to "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" (100%) .

The jackpot type determination table via small hit for the second special symbol in FIG. It is a numerical value that is compared with the value of the random number MR2 for type determination, and includes "11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small hit", "6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small hit", and "4 (via small hit)". 3) A jackpot determination value corresponding to each of "R time-saving jackpot" is set.

In addition, in Figure 9-4 (B2-2), "11 (10) R time saving jackpot via small hit", "6 (5) R time saving jackpot via small hit" and "4 (3) R time saving jackpot via small hit" are shown. Also shown are the number of times the time saving control is executed after the jackpot corresponding to each jackpot. "11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small hit" has a time-saving control number of 99 or 7 times, and "6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small hit" has a time-saving control number of 7 times, "small hit Via 4(3)R Time Saving Jackpot” has 7 time saving controls. In the following explanation, the 11(10)R time-saving jackpot via small hit where the number of time-saving controls is 99 times is appropriately referred to as "11(10)R time-saving jackpot via small hit (99 times)", and the number of time-saving controls is 7 times. The 11 (10) R time saving jackpot via small hit is appropriately referred to as "11 (10) R time saving jackpot (7 times) via small hit", and the 6 (5) R time saving via small hit where the time saving control number is 7 times. The jackpot is appropriately referred to as "Small hit via 6 (5) R time saving jackpot (7 times)", and the small hit via small hit 4 (3) R time saving jackpot where the time saving control number is 7 times is appropriately referred to as "Small hit via 4 (3)". It is called ``R time-saving jackpot (7 times)''.

In this example, in the [2nd special symbol] via small hit jackpot type determination table, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 29 is "11 (10) R time saving jackpot via small hit ( 99 times)" (10%), 30 to 149 are allocated to "11 (10) R time saving jackpot via small hit (7 times)" (40%), and 150 to 164 are It is allocated to "6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small hit (7 times)" (5%), and 165 to 299 is allocated to "4 (3) R time-saving jackpot (7 times) via small hit". (45%).

[Fluctuation pattern determination]
The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and determines whether the fluctuation pattern is one of the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. This fluctuation pattern is determined.

Here, variation pattern determination during hyper rush mode (see FIG. 9-6), which will be described later, will be explained. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination table includes a [missing] fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when it is predetermined that the fluctuation display result will be a "miss", and a fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when the fluctuation display result is determined to be a "jackpot" or a "miss". A variation pattern determination table [for jackpot/small win] used when it is predetermined to make a "small win" is prepared in advance.

[For misses] In the variation pattern judgment table, the random number MR3 for variation pattern judgment is used for the variation patterns of "shortening variation missed", "shortening normal reach missing", and "super shortening variation missing". A predetermined random value within the range that can be taken is assigned as the determination value.

[For jackpot/small hit] In the variation pattern judgment table, for the variation pattern of "shortened normal reach jackpot/small hit" and the variation pattern of "super shortened variation jackpot/small hit", the random number MR3 for variation pattern judgment is used. A predetermined random value within the range that can be taken is assigned as the determination value.

In this embodiment, the jackpot is generated by a symbol jackpot that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a V prize via a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol. Since a jackpot via a small win is included, a common fluctuation pattern is used when the display result is a "jackpot" and when the display result is a "small win." However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and different fluctuation patterns may be used depending on whether the display result is a "big win" or the display result is a "small win."

In this embodiment, in the variation patterns in which the final display result is "miss" (variation patterns of "shortening variation missing", "super shortening variation missing"), the reach state is not established and the final display result is "missing". Something will be announced.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern of "shortening variation miss" is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the display result being "miss" (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "combination for missing decorative symbols". For example, "245 ", "143", etc.) is displayed (stop display and confirmed stop) to notify that the final display result is "miss". The fluctuation time at this time is set to 2 seconds.

In addition, in the variation pattern of "Super Shortened Variation Loss", a result display is executed that displays information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of awarded prize balls, and the display result is "Lose". By displaying (determining and stopping) the combination of small symbols corresponding to this (hereinafter referred to as "combination for missing small symbols", for example, "245", "143", etc.), the final display result becomes " You will be notified that you are out of line. The fluctuation time at this time is set to 1 second.

In this embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is "miss", in the "shortened normal reach missed" variation pattern, a predetermined trigger (operation of the push button 31B, elapse of a predetermined period, etc.) occurs after the reach state is established. It is announced that the final display result is a "miss" by displaying a combination of decorative patterns for a miss (for example, "323", "545", etc.) corresponding to the display result being a "miss". Ru. The fluctuation time at this time is set to 10 seconds.

In this embodiment, as the "decorative pattern combination for loss," there are set a "first loss combination of decorative symbols" in which no reach state is established, and a "second loss combination of decorative symbols" in which a reach state is established. be done. The "first combination of decorative symbols for a miss" is displayed when the variation pattern is "shortened variation missed" or "super shortened variation missed", and the "second combination of decorative symbols for a miss" is displayed for "shortened normal reach missed". ” is displayed when the fluctuation pattern is

In this example, the "first winning combination of decorative symbols" is a combination of decorative symbols in which a reach state is not established, and the types of decorative symbols (characters and numerical symbols (alphabetic symbols)) are all in a loose state. This is a combination of . However, in this example, the "first combination of decorative patterns for losing" includes "135", which is a "special combination of decorative patterns", which will be described later, and "123", which is the "initial combination of decorative patterns", which will be described later. This is a combination of decorative patterns removed.

In this embodiment, in the variation pattern of "shortened normal reach jackpot/small win" among the variation patterns in which the final display result is "jackpot" or "small win", after the reach state is established, a predetermined trigger (push button 31B A combination of decorative patterns corresponding to the display result being a "big hit" or "small win" (hereinafter, a combination of decorative patterns corresponding to the display result being a "big hit") The combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the display result being a "small win" is appropriately referred to as the "small winning combination of decorative symbols") is displayed. It is announced that the final display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." The variation time at this time is set to 15 seconds.

In this embodiment, the "jackpot combination of decorative symbols" is a combination of common decorative symbols including numbers that are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. For example, "333" or "444". In addition, a "small winning combination of decorative symbols" means that a common decorative symbol including numbers that are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R and a display result that is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5C is a "small hit". It is a combination with a decorative pattern corresponding to the following. For example, "3V3" or "4V4".

In this embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "jackpot" or "small win", the variation pattern of "ultra-shortened variation jackpot/small win" is related to the number of jackpots and the total number of awarded prize balls. A result display that displays a result display showing information is executed, and a resurrection display that displays a shooting star on the result display is executed, and the display result is a small symbol corresponding to a "big hit" or "small win". By displaying the combination (determining and stopping), it is announced that the final display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." The fluctuation time at this time is set to 10 seconds.

FIG. 9-5(A) (FIGS. 9-5(A1) and (A2)) is a fluctuation pattern determination table for time-saving 1st to 99th rotations in Hyper Rush mode, and FIG. 9-5(B) ( FIGS. 9-5 (B1) and (B2)) are fluctuation pattern determination tables for the first remaining rotation, the second remaining rotation, the third remaining rotation, and the fourth remaining rotation in the hyper rush mode.

<[Hyper rush mode time saving 1st to 99th rotation] Fluctuation pattern judgment table>
As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), in the [missing] fluctuation pattern judgment table for time-saving 1st to 99th rotations in Hyper Rush mode, 1 out of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997 is 900 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of "shortening variation is off", and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "shortening normal reach is off".

As shown in Figure 9-5 (A2), in the [Jackpot/Small win] fluctuation pattern judgment table for time-saving 1st to 99th rotations in Hyper Rush mode, the judgment value range of MR3 is 1 to 997. Of these, numbers 1 to 997 are assigned to the "shortened normal reach jackpot/small hit" variation pattern.

<[Hyper rush mode remaining hold 1st to 4th rotation] Fluctuation pattern judgment table>
As shown in FIG. 9-5 (B1), in the [missing] variation pattern judgment table for the remaining hold 1st to 4th rotations in Hyper Rush mode, out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super shortening variation deviation".

As shown in Figure 9-5 (B2), in the [Jackpot/Small win] fluctuation pattern judgment table for the remaining 1st to 4th spins in Hyper Rush mode, the range of judgment values for MR3 is 1 to 997. Of these, numbers 1 to 997 are assigned to the "ultra-shortened fluctuation jackpot/small hit" fluctuation pattern.

[Normal production mode]
Each performance mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) when the performance mode is [normal mode] will be explained in detail.

In this embodiment, when the production mode is [normal mode], it is possible to control to multiple types of production modes. When this presentation mode is [normal mode], the plurality of presentation modes include, for example, [sunny mode], [cloudy mode], and [rainy mode].
In the following description, the "sunny mode" when the production mode is the "normal mode" will be referred to as "normal mode (sunny mode)" or simply "sunny mode" as appropriate. The same applies to [cloudy mode] and [rainy mode].

When the production mode is controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)], the production control CPU 120 displays a "sunny background image" representing a sunny landscape including the sun and mountains as the background image of the decorative pattern. will be done.

When the performance mode is controlled to [normal mode (cloudy mode)], the performance control CPU 120 displays a ``cloudy background image'' representing a cloudy landscape as a background image of a decorative pattern.

When the production mode is controlled to [normal mode (rain mode)], the production control CPU 120 displays a ``rain background image'' representing a rainy landscape as a background image of a decorative pattern.

In this embodiment, when the production mode is [Normal Mode], one of the following methods is applied as a method for switching between various production modes ([Sunny Mode], [Cloudy Mode], and [Rain Mode]). be able to.
(A) How to change the performance mode at the specified rotation speed (B) How to change the performance mode by player operation

(A) ``Method of changing presentation mode at specified rotation speed'' is a method in which, after being controlled to one presentation mode, when a variable display of the specified rotation speed is executed, control is made to another presentation mode.
For example, if variable display is performed 30 times after the production mode is controlled to [sunny mode], the production mode is controlled to either [cloudy mode] or [rainy mode].

(B) "How to change the performance mode by player's operation" means that when the control is in one performance mode, if a player's operation on the operation unit is accepted at any timing, it will change to another performance mode. It is a controlled method.
For example, when the production mode is controlled to [sunny mode], the player can select the production selected by operating the push button 31B or the like at the timing when the player wants to change the production mode. mode (either [cloudy mode] or [rainy mode]).

In this embodiment, when the production mode described later is controlled from [Challenge Mode] or [Rush Mode] to [Normal Mode] (hereinafter referred to as "time saving" as appropriate), [Normal Mode] is changed to [Normal Mode]. When the production mode is controlled to [Normal Mode (Sunny Mode)] and then the production mode is controlled to [Normal Mode], various production modes including [Normal Mode (Sunny Mode)] if the production mode can be switched. It is possible to switch to ([Normal mode (sunny mode)], [Normal mode (cloudy mode)], [Normal mode (rainy mode)]).

That is, in this embodiment, the production mode that is controlled after the time-saving exit is fixed to [normal mode (sunny mode)], and thereafter, at a predetermined trigger (for example, when the 20 variable displays end after the time-saving exit). , it is now possible to switch the production mode, and various production modes including [Normal mode (sunny mode)] ([Normal mode (sunny mode)], [Normal mode (cloudy mode)], [Normal mode (rainy mode)]) ) can be switched from.

[Decorative designs, small designs]
Each effect pattern (decoration pattern, small pattern) in this embodiment will be explained in detail.

(decorative design)
In this embodiment, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, decorations as decoration identification information of multiple types different from the special symbols are displayed in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. A variable display of symbols is performed. The decorative designs in this embodiment are composed of characters, numerical designs representing numbers, and alphabetic characters representing alphabetic characters.

A decorative pattern that includes a character and a number pattern is, for example, a decorative pattern that includes the character "A" and the number "1", a decorative pattern that includes the character "B" and the number "2", or a decorative pattern that includes the character "C" and the number "2". 3”, a decorative pattern including the character “D” and the number “4”, a decorative pattern including the character “E” and the number “5”, a decorative pattern including the character “F” and the number “6” It refers to a pattern, a decorative pattern including the character "G" and the number "7", etc.

Further, the decorative pattern including a character and an alphabetic pattern is, for example, a decorative pattern including a character "V" and an alphabetic character "V".

(Small design)
In the present embodiment, a symbol that is smaller than a decorative symbol and that is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 and that indicates whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the display result of the special symbol is referred to as a small symbol. to be called. The variable display of the small symbols can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stationary display of the small symbols can also be executed in parallel with the stationary display of the special symbols. Then, from the left, the area at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 where the small symbols corresponding to the first special symbol are variably displayed and statically displayed are a small symbol display area 5l, a small symbol display area 5c, and a small symbol display area 5r. The upper right area of the screen of the image display device 5 where the small symbols corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed in a variable and static manner is also common to the aforementioned small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

The display areas of the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are smaller than those of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern is lower than that of the decorative pattern.

[Active display, pending display, number of pending memories]
In this embodiment, a first pending display area 09TM01E is provided at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, and the first pending display area 09TM01E is provided to display the first pending storage number (0 to 4 first pending displays 09TM01). A second reservation display area 09TM02E is provided at the lower right of the screen of the device 5 to display the second reservation storage number (0 to 4 second reservation displays 09TM02). In addition, at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5, an active display 09TM03 is displayed, which is information corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols being executed, and also information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols being executed. An active display area 09TM03E is provided.

Furthermore, a first pending storage number display area 09TM05E for displaying the first pending storage number is provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the first pending display area 09TM01E), and the screen of the image display device 5 A second pending storage number display area 09TM06E that displays the second pending storage number is provided on the right side (above the second pending display area 09TM02E).

Here, the first pending display area 09TM01E displays a number of objects (round images) corresponding to the first pending memory number, and the second pending display area 09TM02E displays a number of objects (round images) corresponding to the second pending memory number. A number object (a round image) is displayed. On the other hand, the first pending memory number display area 09TM05E displays the first pending memory number as a numerical value, and the second pending memory number display area 09TM06E displays the second pending memory number as a numerical value. The display range of objects in the first pending display area 09TM01E is wider than the display range of numerical values in the first pending storage number display area 09TM05E. It will be displayed with higher visibility than the number display area 09TM05E. Further, the display range of objects in the second pending display area 09TM02E is wider than the display range of numerical values in the second pending storage number display area 09TM06E, and the second pending storage number is displayed in the second pending display area 09TM02E. It will be displayed with higher visibility than the pending storage number display area 09TM06E.

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be explained. In this example, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state), and the production mode when the first flag, second flag, and third flag, which will be described later, are not set is [normal mode ], the game state is controlled to either the time saving state (low accuracy/high base state) or the normal state (low accuracy/low base state), and the first flag described later is set. The mode is [Challenge Mode], the gaming state is controlled to either the time saving state (low accuracy/high base state) or the normal state (low accuracy/low base state), and the second flag described below is set. The production mode when the player is playing is [Rush Mode], and the gaming state is controlled to either the time saving state (low accuracy/high base state) or the normal state (low accuracy/low base state), and the The production mode when the 3 flag is set is [Hyper Rush Mode] (see Figure 9-6).

In the example of the game flow shown in Figure 9-6, a jackpot occurs when the performance mode is [Normal mode], and after the jackpot game state ends, the time saving state (low probability/high base state) is controlled, and the [Challenge Mode] (Time saving 1 rotation + Hold 4 rotations) or [Hyper rush mode] (Time saving 99 rotations + Hold 4 rotations) If a jackpot occurs, [Rush mode] (Time saving 7 rotations + Hold 4 rotations) or Shifts to [Hyper Rush Mode] (time saving 99 rotations + 4 pending rotations), and shifts to [Normal Mode] if a jackpot does not occur.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-2, "4 (3) R time-saving jackpot via small hit" is determined by the V judgment winning device 87 for one set number of times (0.1 seconds x 10 times, total 1 It is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened 3 times (3R) on the condition of winning a V prize within the number of rounds after being opened (round equivalent period), and the winning device opens for 4 rounds, but in reality The number of times the big winning hole is opened is three times, and the player recognizes the opening of the big winning hole as a jackpot type similar to the symbol 3R time-saving jackpot. In addition, "6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small hit" is the number of times for one set after the V judgment winning device 87 is released for one set of times (0.1 seconds x 10 times, a period equivalent to one round in total). It is a jackpot in which the grand prize opening is opened 5 times (5R) on the condition of winning V in Regarding the opening of the jackpot, the person recognizes that the jackpot type is the same as the jackpot equivalent to the symbol 5R time-saving jackpot. In addition, "11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small hit" is the number of times for one set after the V judgment winning device 87 is released for one set number of times (0.1 seconds x 10 times, a period equivalent to one round in total). It is a jackpot in which the grand prize opening is opened 10 times (10R) on the condition of winning V in Regarding the opening of the jackpot, the person recognizes that the jackpot type is the same as the symbol 10R time-saving jackpot.

Normally, players recognize the jackpot type based on the actual number of openings of the jackpot (for example, the number of long openings of up to 29 seconds). ” and “4 (3) R time-saving jackpot via small hit” are referred to as “3R time-saving jackpot”, and the jackpot types “10R time-saving jackpot” and “11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small hit” are referred to as “10R It's called a "time-saving jackpot." In addition, the jackpot type "6(5)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" is referred to as "5R time-saving jackpot".

(1) When the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state) and the first flag, which will be described later, the second flag, which will be described later, and the third flag, which will be described later, are not set, the production mode is It is set to [Normal mode]. (1A) As a production example when the production mode is [Normal mode (sunny mode)], a sunny background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a background image of a decorative pattern, and (1B) the production mode is [Normal mode (sunny mode)]. (1C) As an example of a production when the production mode is [Normal mode (rain mode)], a cloudy background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a background image of a decorative pattern, and (1C) the production mode is [Normal mode (rain mode)]. In this case, a rain background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a background image of a decorative pattern.

(2) In the above-mentioned state (1), when a variable display in which the display result is a "jackpot" is executed, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, the jackpot types of the first special symbol include "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" and "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot", and (2A) as an example of production when the jackpot type is "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot", The characters "FEVER" are displayed on the image display device 5 to inform that it is a 3R jackpot, and (2B) as an example of the production when the jackpot type is "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot", it is displayed that it is a 10R jackpot. The words "MAX FEVER" to be notified are displayed on the image display device 5.

(3) When the above-mentioned (2A) jackpot type is "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot", when the jackpot ends, the performance control CPU 120 sets the first flag (3A-I) and the gaming state is changed to the time-saving state ( (3A-II) The first flag is set and the gaming state changes to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state). The effect mode is set to [ Challenge mode]. As an example of a performance when the performance mode is [Challenge Mode], the words ``Rush Challenge'' are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the performance mode will shift to [Challenge Mode].

In state (3), one variable display in the time-saving state in which all display results are "lost" and a pending memory (execution is pending (in this example, up to 4 When variable display) is executed, the state is controlled to state (1). In this example, when the state (3) is controlled to the state (1), the state is controlled to the state (1A) (the production mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]).

Further, in the state (3), if a small hit puncture, which will be described later, occurs and the remaining time saving control number at this time is 0, the control is performed in the state (1). In this example, when the state (3) is controlled to the state (1), the state is controlled to the state (1A) (the production mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]).

(4) When the jackpot ends when the jackpot type (6A) described later is "3R time-saving jackpot" or "5R time-saving jackpot", or "10R of the jackpot type of (6C) "10R time-saving jackpot" described later When the jackpot ends in the case of "time saving jackpot (7 times)", the performance control CPU 120 sets the second flag (4A-I) and controls the gaming state to the time saving state (low probability/high base state). When the variable display is executed seven times, the second flag (4A-II) is set, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state), and the (4A-I) [Rush mode] is the performance mode when the suspended memory (variable display whose execution is suspended (maximum of 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurs at the time is executed. As an example of a performance when the performance mode is [Rush Mode], the words "Battle Rush" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the performance mode will shift to [Rush Mode].

In state (4), all display results are "lost", 7 variable displays in the time saving state, and a pending memory (execution is pending (in this example, up to 4 When variable display) is executed, the state is controlled to state (1). In this example, when the state (4) is controlled to the state (1), the state is controlled to the state (1A) (the production mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]).

Further, in the state (4), if a small hit puncture occurs and the remaining time saving control number at this time is 0, the control is performed to the state (1). In this example, when the state (4) is controlled to the state (1), the state is controlled to the state (1A) (the production mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]).

(5) When the above-mentioned (2B) jackpot type is "Symbol 10R time-saving jackpot", when the jackpot ends, or (6C) "10R time-saving jackpot" described later, "10R time-saving jackpot (99 times)" )", when the jackpot ends, the performance control CPU 120 sets the third flag (5B-I), controls the gaming state to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and wins 99 times ( When the variable display (from 1st rotation to 99th rotation) is executed, the third flag (5B-II) is set, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state), and (5B - The performance mode is set to [Hyper Rush Mode] when the suspended memory (variable display whose execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the starting prize that occurred at the time of I) is executed. . As an example of a production when the production mode is [Hyper Rush Mode], a caption display containing the words "HYPER" that informs that the production mode is transitioning to [Hyper Rush Mode] and the text "Battle Rush" are displayed in an image. It is displayed on the display device 5.

In state (5), 99 variable displays in the time-saving state in which all display results are "lost" and pending memory (execution is pending (in this example, up to 4 When variable display) is executed, the state is controlled to state (1). However, in the present embodiment where a small hit occurs with a probability of about 1/7 in the variable display of the second special symbol, the state (5) where the time saving control number is 99 is the variable display of the second special symbol. When this is executed, it can be said that the jackpot via the next small win is substantially determined, so an example of control from state (5) to state (1) is not shown. .

Further, if a small hit puncture occurs in state (5), control is performed to state (1) regardless of the remaining time saving control number at this time (see FIG. 9-8(B)). In this example, when the state (5) is controlled to the state (1), the state is controlled to the state (1A) (the production mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]).

(6) When the production mode is [Challenge Mode] (see (3)), when the production mode is [Rush Mode] (see (4)), or when the production mode is [Hyper Rush Mode] (Refer to (5)), when the display result becomes "big hit" or "small win" in any of the variable displays, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state (including a jackpot gaming state via small winning). In this embodiment, the jackpot type of the second special symbol when the display result is a "jackpot" is "symbol 10R time saving jackpot", and the second special symbol when the display result is a "small win" is the jackpot type of the second special symbol. There are ``4 (3) R time-saving jackpot via small hit'', ``6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small hit'', and ``11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small hit'' as the jackpot types via small hit.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, (6A) As an example of the production when the jackpot type is "3R time-saving jackpot", the characters "FEVER" that notify that it is actually a 3R jackpot are displayed on the image display device 5. (6B) As an example of the effect when the jackpot type is "5R time-saving jackpot", the words "BIG FEVER" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that it is essentially a 5R jackpot. (6C) As an example of the performance when the jackpot type is "10R time-saving jackpot", the words "MAX FEVER" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that it is essentially a 10R jackpot. At this time, among the jackpot types of "10R time-saving jackpot", "10R time-saving jackpot (99 times)" where the number of time-saving controls is 99 times, and "10R time-saving jackpot (7 times)" where the number of time-saving controls is 7 times. is set.

[First flag, second flag, third flag]
Next, the first flag, second flag, and third flag in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 9-7 is a time chart showing the control timing of the gaming state related to the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag.

When the game state is controlled to a normal state (low probability/low base state), a jackpot whose jackpot type is "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot" occurs and the jackpot game state is controlled to be a jackpot game state. After the end of the jackpot game state, when the game state is controlled to the time saving state (low probability/high base state), the performance control CPU 120 sets the first flag (timing T1 shown in FIG. 9-7). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode to [challenge mode].

After the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state (low accuracy/high base state), when the first fluctuation display in which the display result is "off" is completed, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state). (timing of T2 shown in Figure 9-7). Suspended memory (variable display whose execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred during the period T1 to T2 (first variable display period of Rush Challenge) shown in Figure 9-7 The fluctuation display based on is executed, and in any of the fluctuation displays based on the pending memory (maximum of 4 in this example) for the relevant period, the jackpot type is "4 (3) R time-saving jackpot via small hit" or If it is "6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small hit", when the variable display ends, it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state (jackpot gaming state via small winning) (timing of T3 shown in Figure 9-7) . At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the [challenge mode].

When the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to a time saving state (low probability/high base state), and the performance control CPU 120 erases the first flag and sets the second flag (see FIG. 9-7). (timing of T4 shown). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode to [rush mode].

After the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state (low accuracy/high base state), when the seven fluctuating displays in which the display result is "off" are completed, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state). (timing of T5 shown in Figure 9-7). Suspended memory (execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example) corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred during the period T4 to T5 (the 1st to 7th variable display period of Battle Rush) shown in Figure 9-7. The variable display based on the variable display) is executed, and in any of the variable displays based on the pending memory for the relevant period (maximum of 4 in this example), the jackpot type is "Symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" or "small hit". Via 11 (10) R time-saving jackpot (99 times)", when the fluctuating display ends, it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state (jackpot gaming state via small winning) (timing of T6 shown in Figure 9-7 ). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the [rush mode].

When the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to a time saving state (low probability/high base state), and the performance control CPU 120 erases the second flag and sets the third flag (see FIG. 9-7). (timing of T7 shown). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode to [hyper rush mode].

After the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state (low accuracy/high base state), when the display result is "off" 99 times of fluctuation display ends, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state) (timing of T8 shown in FIG. 9-7). Suspended memory (execution is suspended (up to 4 in this example) corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred during the period from T7 to T8 (the 1st to 99th variable display period of Hyper Battle Rush) shown in Figure 9-7. If a variable display is executed based on the variable display (variable display that is currently available), and the display result is "miss" in all of the variable displays based on the pending memory (in this example, up to 4) for the relevant period, that variable display When the process ends, the effect control CPU 120 erases the third flag (timing T9 shown in FIG. 9-7). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the [Hyper Battle Rush] and shifts to the [Normal Mode] effect mode.

[Erase timing of first flag and second flag]
In this embodiment, any one of the following timings (1) to (3) is set as the timing for erasing the first flag and the second flag. Note that the timings shown in (1) to (3) are only examples of the erasing timings of the first flag and the second flag, and are not limited to such forms. Other timings different from the timings shown in (1) to (3) may be set as the erasing timings of the first flag and the second flag.

(1) The first flag and the second flag indicate that when these flags are set, the specified number of times of time saving control (1 time, 7 (in other words, if the display result is a "miss" or the display result is a "small win" and a small win puncture occurs). When the number of pending memories (variable displays whose execution is suspended (maximum 4 in this example)) corresponding to the start-up winnings that occurred during the time-saving state control period is 0, the time-saving state will be described later. If the display result of the final variation display is "miss", it will be erased at the timing when this time-saving final variation display ends, and if the display result of the time-saving final variation display is "small win", it will be explained later in that small win gaming state. A small hit blowout occurs and is erased at the timing when the small win game state ends.

(2) The first flag and the second flag indicate that when these flags are set, the specified number of times of time saving control (1 time, 7 (in other words, if the display result is a "miss" or the display result is a "small win" and a small win puncture occurs). When the number of pending memories corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred during the period controlled by the time saving state is one or more, the holding memory corresponding to the starting winnings occurring during the period controlled by the time saving state is based on the pending memory. If the game is not controlled to a jackpot gaming state in response to all the fluctuation displays (i.e., if the display result is a "miss" or if the display result is a "small win" and a small hit puncture occurs), If the display result of the variable display based on the last pending memory is a "miss", it will be erased at the timing when the variable display ends, and if the display result of the variable display based on the last pending memory is a "small hit", A small hit puncture occurs in the small winning gaming state, and is erased at the timing when the small winning gaming state ends.

(3) The first flag and the second flag are erased at the timing when the jackpot gaming state ends when the jackpot gaming state is controlled with these flags set.

[Third flag erasure timing]
In this embodiment, the timing for erasing the third flag can be set to any one of the following timings (1) to (4). Note that the timings shown in (1) to (4) are only examples of the timing for erasing the third flag, and are not limited to such a form. Other timings different from the timings shown in (1) to (4) may be set as the erasing timing of the third flag.

(1) The third flag indicates that when this flag is set, all of the specified number of times of time-saving control (99 times) are displayed after the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state (low accuracy/high base state). If the display result of the fluctuation display is "miss", and the number of pending memories corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred during the period under control of the time-saving state is 0, the time-saving final fluctuation display ends. will be deleted.

(2) The third flag indicates that when this flag is set, all of the specified number of times of time-saving control (99 times) are displayed after the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state (low accuracy/high base state). If the display result of the fluctuation display is "miss", and the number of pending memories corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred during the period of time-saving state control is 1 or more, the time-saving state is being controlled. If the display results of all the variable displays based on the pending memory corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred during the period are "lost", the variable display based on the last pending memory is erased at the timing when the variable display based on the last pending memory ends.

(3) With this flag set, after the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state (low accuracy/high base state), the specified number of time saving control times (99 times) will be displayed and the time saving will be changed. When the number of pending memories corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred during the period controlled by the state is one or more, the display result of one of the variable displays based on the pending memory is a "small hit". In some cases, a small win puncture occurs in the small win game state, and is erased at the timing when the small win game state ends (see FIG. 9-8(B)).

(4) If the third flag is set and the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the third flag is erased at the timing when the jackpot gaming state ends.

[Small hit punk]
In this embodiment, when a small hit occurs and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, a game ball wins in the V winning area 870 and the game ball is activated by the V winning switch 87a during a predetermined validity period. When detected, the conditions for generating a jackpot are established, and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The winning of a game ball in such a V winning area 870 is called a V winning. However, when a small hit occurs and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, no game ball enters the V winning area 870 and no game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a during the predetermined validity period. Then, the conditions for generating a jackpot are not satisfied, and the game is not controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In this way, a case where the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 during a small winning game and the small winning game ends without a V winning occurring is referred to as a "small winning puncture".

As shown in the explanation of Figure 8-1, if the remaining time saving control number is 1 or more after the end of the small winning game state when a small winning puncture occurs (when a V winning does not occur), the continuation is continued. When the remaining time saving control number is 0 after the end of the small winning game state when a small winning puncture occurs, the control is carried out to the normal state. In the following explanation, a case will be described in which the remaining time saving control number is one or more after the end of the small winning game state when a small winning puncture occurs.

In this embodiment, the gaming state that is controlled after the end of the small winning gaming state where the small winning blowout has occurred can be changed depending on the type of the time saving state immediately before being controlled to the small winning gaming state where the small winning blowout has occurred. It is possible.

In this example, (A) when the second flag is set (that is, when the production mode is [rush mode]), a small hit occurs while the time saving state is controlled, and this small hit When a small hit puncture occurs in the gaming state, if the remaining time saving control number is one or more, the time saving state is continued after the small winning gaming state ends. On the other hand, (B) if the third flag is set (i.e., when the performance mode is [Hyper Rush Mode]), a small hit occurs while the time saving state is controlled, and this small hit When a small hit puncture occurs in the gaming state, even if the remaining time saving control number is one or more, the control is returned to the normal state after the small winning gaming state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-6, when the first flag is set (that is, when the production mode is [Challenge Mode]), the number of times the time saving control is performed is one. , After the end of the small winning game state in which the small winning puncture occurred, the remaining time saving control count was 0, and the gaming state was configured to be controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the time saving state. Regardless of the format, if the first flag is set (i.e., when the production mode is [Challenge Mode]), by adopting a configuration in which the number of times of time saving control is 2 or more, it is possible to prevent small hits from blowing. If the remaining time saving control number is one or more after the end of the small winning game state that has occurred, the time saving state may be continued after the small winning game ends.

FIG. 9-8 is a time chart showing the control timing of the gaming state according to the type of time saving state when a small hit puncture occurs. Figure 9-8(A) shows that when the second flag is set (that is, when the performance mode is [rush mode]), a small win occurs in a small win game that occurs while the time saving state is controlled. It is a time chart showing the control timing of the gaming state when a blowout occurs. Figure 9-8(B) shows that when the third flag is set (that is, when the performance mode is [Hyper Rush Mode]), a small winning game that occurs when the time saving state is controlled is shown. It is a time chart showing the control timing of the game state when a hit blowout occurs. In the following explanation, a case will be described in which the remaining time saving control number is one or more after the end of the small winning game state when a small winning puncture occurs.

As shown in Figure 9-8 (A), when the gaming state is controlled to a time saving state (low accuracy/high base state) (based on the second flag being set, the production mode is set to [rush In any of the variable displays in which the display result is a "small hit", and a small win occurs, when the variable display ends, The small winning game state is controlled (timing T1 shown in FIG. 9-8(A)). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the [rush mode].

When the small winning gaming state ends without winning V, that is, when a small winning puncture occurs, the CPU 103 continues the gaming state and controls the time saving state (low accuracy/high base state), and the performance control CPU 120 Continuously set the 2 flag without erasing it (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-8 (2)). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 sets the performance mode to [rush mode] based on the fact that the second flag is set (not cleared).

As shown in FIG. 9-8(B), when the gaming state is controlled to a time saving state (low accuracy/high base state) (based on the third flag being set, the performance mode is set to [Hyper If the display result is a "small hit", and a small hit occurs, when the variable display ends, the display result is a "small hit". , the small winning game state is controlled (timing T1 shown in FIG. 9-8(B)). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the [hyper rush mode].

When the small winning game state ends without winning V, that is, when a small winning blowout occurs, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state), and the production control CPU 120 erases the third flag. (Timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-8(B)). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 sets the performance mode to [normal mode] based on the fact that the third flag is erased and none of the first to third flags are set.

In this embodiment, a small hit corresponding to a small hit that occurs when the production mode is either [Challenge Mode] or [Rush Mode] (either the first flag or the second flag is set). In the winning game, when a small winning puncture occurs, (A) If the remaining time saving control number after the end of the small winning game state is 1 or more, the production mode will display a fluctuation display of the remaining time saving control number. Until it is executed, the production mode ([Challenge Mode], [Rush Mode]) that was controlled before the relevant small winning game is controlled again, and (B) the remaining time saving control number after the end of the small winning game state is 0. If it is the second time, the production mode is controlled to [normal mode].

For example, when the production mode is [Rush Mode], a small hit occurs on the 7th variable display (at this time, there are 4 variable displays pending execution) under the control of the time saving state. When a puncture occurs, the variable display of the second special symbol for four times whose execution has been suspended is executed with the production mode being controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)] after the completion of the small hit.

At this time, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the jackpot display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the small winning combination of decorative symbols that was stopped and displayed in the variable display when the previous small hit occurred. The combination is displayed (see Figure 9-16), and the variable display of the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol for the four times whose execution is pending is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a small winning game corresponding to a small winning that occurs when the production mode is [hyper rush mode] (a state where the third flag is set), when a small winning puncture occurs, , (C) Regardless of the number of remaining time saving control times after the end of the small winning game state, the performance mode is controlled to the [normal mode].

For example, when the production mode is [Hyper Rush Mode], a small hit that occurs on the 10th variable display (at this time, there are 4 variable displays whose execution is pending) under the control of the time saving state. When a hit blowout occurs, after the small hit ends, the production mode is controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)], and the fluctuating display of the second special symbol for the 4 times whose execution has been suspended is executed. .

At this time, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the jackpot display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the small winning combination of decorative symbols that was stopped and displayed in the variable display when the previous small hit occurred. The combination is displayed (see Figure 9-16), and the variable display of the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol for the four times whose execution is pending is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. executed.

[Process for determining performance at the start of fluctuation]
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result specification command that specifies a display result, a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern, and a pending memory number subtraction specification command (first pending memory number subtraction specification). command or second pending storage number subtraction designation command) to the production control CPU 120.

When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started, the production control CPU 120 sends a pending memory number subtraction designation command (first pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the number of pending memories has been subtracted. Specify the display result (big hit, small hit, or miss, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot via a small hit). Based on receiving a set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100, including a display result designation command and a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates the special symbol fluctuation time and performance contents (reach, pseudo-run, etc.) , it is possible to specify that the special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner, as well as the special symbol's variation time and production contents (reach, pseudo-run, etc.).

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the display result is determined, the performance control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and receives the special symbol (the first special symbol). It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIG. 9-9 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed at the start of variation. The performance control CPU 120 executes the variable start performance determination process shown in FIG. 9-9 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the performance control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, upon receiving the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. A production control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern is set based on the specified variation pattern. The effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display is determined by the variation start effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-9.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether any one of the first flag, the second flag, or the third flag is set (step S09TM1010).

If none of the first flag, second flag, or third flag is set (NO in step S09TM1010), the production control CPU 120 advances the process to steps S09TM1020 and thereafter. If none of the first flag, second flag, or third flag is set (NO in step S09TM1010), this means that the production mode is controlled to [normal mode], so step The processes after S09TM1020 are processes that are executed when the production mode is controlled to [normal mode].

If either the first flag, the second flag, or the third flag is set (YES in step S09TM1010), the production control CPU 120 advances the process to step S09TM1060 and thereafter. If any of the first flag, second flag, or third flag is set (YES in step S09TM1010, the production mode is [Challenge Mode], [Rush Mode], or [Hyper Rush Mode) ], the processing from step S09TM1060 onward is performed when the production mode is controlled to one of [Challenge Mode], [Rush Mode], or [Hyper Rush Mode]. This is the process to be executed.

If none of the first flag, second flag, or third flag is set (NO in step S09TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (to be executed from now on) specified by the display result specification command. It is determined whether the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot" (step S09TM1020).

If the display result is a "jackpot" (YES in step S09TM1020), the production control CPU 120 selects the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed when the variable display ends, using the [first special symbol] decorative symbol combination described later. It is determined based on the jackpot combination determination table (see FIG. 9-10(A)) (step S09TM1030).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute a symbol stop motion performance, which will be described later, and a symbol stop sound performance, which will be described later (see FIGS. 9-11) (step S09TM1040), and ends the process.

In addition, when the display result is "miss" (NO in step S09TM1020), the performance control CPU 120 selects the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display from the decorative symbol combination determination table (defective). (as shown in the figure) (step S09TM1050), and the process ends.

In this embodiment, the "combination for missing decorative symbols" includes a combination for a jackpot of decorative symbols (in this example, "333", etc.), a combination for a small win in decorative symbols (in this example, "3V3", etc.), This is a combination of decorative patterns that is different from any of the special combinations of decorative patterns (in this example, "135") that will be described later.

If any of the first flag, second flag, or third flag is set (YES in step S09TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (which will be executed from now on) specified by the display result specification command. It is determined whether the display result of the variable display) is either a "big hit" or a "small hit" (step S09TM1060).

If the display result is either a "big hit" or a "small win" (YES in step S09TM1060), the performance control CPU 120 selects a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display, as will be described later. 2 special symbol] Decorative symbol jackpot combination determination table (see Figure 9-10 (B1)), or [Second special symbol] decorative symbol jackpot (small hit) combination determination table (see Figure 9-10 (B1)), which will be described later. 9-10 (B2)) (step S09TM1070).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the symbol stop action performance and the symbol stop sound performance (see FIGS. 9-11) (step S09TM1080), and ends the process as is.

Further, if the display result is "miss" (NO in step S09TM1060), the performance control CPU 120 selects the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display from the decorative symbol combination determination table for missing decorative symbols. (not shown) (step S09TM1090), and the process ends.

<Decorative pattern combination determination table>
FIGS. 9-10 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of a decorative pattern combination determination table. As shown in FIGS. 9-10, in this embodiment, judgment values are allocated such that the determination ratio of the combination of decorative symbols differs depending on the display result and the jackpot type corresponding to the display result. .

([For the first special symbol] Jackpot combination determination table for decorative symbols)
In Figure 9-10 (A), the display result corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol specified by the display result specification command is "Jackpot", and the jackpot type corresponding to this "Jackpot" is "Symbol 3R time saving". It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a jackpot combination determination table of decorative symbols in the case of either "jackpot" or "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot".

When the jackpot type is "Symbol 3R time-saving jackpot", the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is determined to be "111" at a rate of 15%, and similarly, "222" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the combination for jackpot is determined at a rate of 10%. ``333'' is determined, ``444'' is determined at 20% rate, ``555'' is determined at 15% rate, and ``666'' is determined at 20% rate.

When the jackpot type is "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot", the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is determined to be "777" at a rate of 100%.

In this way, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot combinations of decorative symbols "111" to "666" are stopped and displayed, the player can recognize that the jackpot type is "symbol 3R time-saving jackpot". When the jackpot combination of decorative symbols ``777'' is stopped and displayed, the player can recognize that the jackpot type is ``symbol 10R time-saving jackpot''. Therefore, when the jackpot combination of decorative symbols "777" is stopped and displayed, the player can recognize that the game will be controlled to the [hyper rush mode] after the jackpot game.

([For 2nd special symbol] Decorative symbol jackpot combination determination table)
In Figure 9-10 (B1), the display result corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol specified by the display result designation command is "Jackpot", and the jackpot type corresponding to this "Jackpot" is "Symbol 10R time saving". It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a jackpot combination determination table of decorative symbols in the case of "Jackpot".

When the jackpot type is "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot", the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is determined to be "777" at a rate of 100%.

([For second special design] Decorative pattern jackpot (small hit) combination determination table)
In Figure 9-10 (B2), the display result corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol specified by the display result specification command is "Small hit", and the jackpot type corresponding to this "Small hit" is "Small hit". For jackpots with decorative patterns when it is either 11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via hit, 6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, or 4 (3) R time-saving jackpot via small hit. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a combination determination table (for small winnings).

If the jackpot type is "11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small hit", the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is determined to be "111" and the small winning combination of decorative symbols is determined to be "1V1" at a rate of 10%. Similarly, at a rate of 10%, "222" and "2V2", at a rate of 10%, "333" and "3V3", at a rate of 10%, "444" and "4V4", at a rate of 10%, " 555" and "5V5", "666" and "6V6" at a rate of 10%, and "777" and "7V7" at a rate of 40%.

If the jackpot type is "6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small hit", the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is determined to be "111" and the small winning combination of decorative symbols is determined to be "1V1" at a rate of 15%. Similarly, at a rate of 20%, "222" and "2V2", at a rate of 10%, "333" and "3V3", at a rate of 20%, "444" and "4V4", at a rate of 15%, " 555'' and ``5V5'', and ``666'' and ``6V6'' at a rate of 20%.

If the jackpot type is "4(3)R time-saving jackpot via small hit", the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is determined to be "111" and the small winning combination of decorative symbols is determined to be "1V1" at a rate of 15%. Similarly, "222" and "2V2" at a rate of 20%, "333" and "3V3" at a rate of 10%, "444" and "4V4" at a rate of 20%, and 555 at a rate of 15%. and "666" and "6V6" are determined at a rate of 20% of "5V5".

In this embodiment, when determining a jackpot (small win) combination of decorative symbols, a "jackpot combination of decorative symbols" is determined, and a "decorative symbol" corresponding to this "jackpot combination of decorative symbols" is determined. The small winning combination is determined. That is, the "jackpot combination of decorative symbols" and the "small winning combination of decorative symbols" are determined at the same time.

In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the "jackpot combination of decorative symbols" and the "small winning combination of decorative symbols" are determined in advance in a common process (step S09TM1070) at the timing of the start of fluctuation, the small In irregular situations such as when a hit or puncture occurs, this predetermined combination of decorative symbols ("jackpot combination of decorative symbols", "small winning combination of decorative symbols") should be displayed. It is only necessary to display it at the timing of , which can reduce the processing burden of production control.

In addition, it is not limited to the configuration in which the "jackpot combination of decorative patterns" and the "small winning combination of decorative patterns" are determined at the same time, but the "jackpot combination of decorative patterns" and the "small winning combination of decorative patterns" can be determined separately. You may decide. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the "small winning combination of decorative symbols" is determined after the "jackpot combination of decorative symbols" is determined, or after the "small winning combination of decorative symbols" is determined, the "decorative A configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot combination is determined.

[Symbol stop motion production, symbol stop sound production]
In this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "jackpot" or "small win", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the display result is a "jackpot" or a "small win" at the timing when the decorative pattern should be stopped and displayed. It is possible to perform a symbol stop action performance and a symbol stop sound performance to notify that a "small hit" has occurred.

The symbol stop action performance is a performance that is executed when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "big hit" or "small hit", and is performed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. This is an effect in which the decorative patterns (in this example, characters, numbers, and letters) perform actions (in this example, enlargement and movement) at the timing when the decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. At the timing at which the decorative pattern should be fixed and stopped (such as the timing at which a pattern confirmation designation command is received), the pattern stopping motion performance is finished, and the action of the decorative pattern is also finished. In the pattern stop action performance, the decoration pattern performs an action to notify that the display result of the variable display being executed is a "big hit" or "small win" and to improve the interest of the game.

The symbol stop sound effect is an effect that is executed when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "big hit" or "small hit", and is performed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. This is an effect in which a pattern stop sound effect is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the timing when the decorative pattern should be stopped and displayed. At the timing at which the decorative pattern should be fixed and stopped (such as the timing at which a pattern confirmation designation command is received), the pattern stop sound performance is finished, and the reproduction output of the pattern stop sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is also finished. In the symbol stop sound production, the speaker 8L and 8R playback and output the symbol stop sound effect to notify that the display result of the variable display being executed is a "big hit" or "small win" and to It can improve your interest.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display being executed is "miss", neither the symbol stop action effect nor the symbol stop sound effect is executed. At the timing when the decorative pattern should be stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern (in this example, the character, number pattern, and alphabetic pattern) does not perform any action (enlargement, movement), and the speaker 8L, 8R also plays and outputs the pattern stop sound effect. By not doing so, it is possible to notify that the display result of the variable display being executed is a "miss" and to prevent the player from inadvertently aggravating a sense of disappointment in the game.

Further, in this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "big hit" or "small win", the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At a timing different from the correct timing, neither the symbol stop action performance nor the symbol stop sound performance is executed.

For example, a decorative pattern corresponding to the display result of the variable display executed immediately before the jackpot game being a "jackpot" or "small win" may be displayed for a period of time until the first variable display is executed after the jackpot game. Neither the symbol stop action effect nor the symbol stop sound effect is executed at the timing when the symbol should be displayed.

[Example of symbol stop motion production and symbol stop sound production]
FIGS. 9-11 are explanatory diagrams showing the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the effect sound reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R, related to the symbol stop action effect and the symbol stop sound effect. Figures 9-11 (1), (2A), and (3A) show the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the reproduction output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the symbol stop action effect and the symbol stop sound effect are not executed. FIG. Figures 9-11 (1), (2B), and (3B) show the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and played back from the speakers 8L and 8R when the symbol stop action effect and the symbol stop sound effect are executed. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect sounds that are output.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the character "C" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the ready-to-reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. A ready-to-win state is established by stopping and displaying a decorative pattern including the number "3". At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display small symbols in a variable manner. That is, the small symbols are also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the ornamental symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the ornamental symbols are stopped and displayed. The variable display continues without being displayed.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion display 09TM31B urging the player to operate the push button 31B at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Here, the operation promotion display 09TM31B is displayed with a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher than the panel image and is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it appears in the foreground when viewed from the player).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the active display area 09TM03E to display an active display 09TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first pending memory number display area 09TM05E and displays "0" in the second pending memory number display area 09TM06E.

<Example of production when the symbol stop action production and symbol stop sound production are not executed>
Next, if it is decided not to perform the symbol stop action performance and the symbol stop sound performance at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (2A), a predetermined opportunity (the player presses the push button 31B) operation, the timing at which the decorative pattern should be stopped and displayed in the fluctuating pattern, etc.), the performance control CPU 120 displays a combination for missing the decorative pattern (in this example Now, "323") is stopped and displayed. At this time, variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (3A), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the production control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation designation command, selects the final decoration design for the final decorative symbol. The combination (in this example, "323") is fixed and stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "323") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 09TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is erased from the active display area 09TM03E.

<Example of production when performing symbol stop action production and symbol stop sound production>
Next, if it is decided to execute the symbol stop action effect and the symbol stop sound effect at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (2B), a predetermined opportunity (the player presses the push button 31B) operation, the timing at which the decorative pattern should be stopped and displayed in the fluctuating pattern, etc.), the performance control CPU 120 executes the pattern stop action performance, and displays the decoration whose display result is a "jackpot" in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. An action is performed on the jackpot combination of symbols (in this example, expansion and movement is performed on a decorative symbol including the character "C" and the number "3"), a symbol stop sound effect is executed, and a symbol stop effect is generated from speakers 8L and 8R. Play and output the sound. At this time, variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (3B), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the production control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command ends the symbol stop motion production, In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the action of the decorative symbols is finished, the final jackpot combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "333") is determined and stopped, the symbol stop sound production is finished, and the speaker The reproduction output of the symbol stop sound effect is ended from 8L and 8R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "333") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 09TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is erased from the active display area 09TM03E.

[Small hit production decision processing]
FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during a small hit. The performance control CPU 120 executes the small hit performance determination process shown in FIGS. 9-12 in the small hit performance process (step S174) of the performance control process shown in FIG. Specifically, upon receiving the small hit start designation command, the production control CPU 120 determines the production to be executed during the small win (and the production not to be executed) through the production determination process during the small win shown in FIG. 9-12. .

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether either the first promotion performance described below or the second promotion performance described below is being executed (step S09TM2010). If either the first promotion effect or the second promotion effect is being executed (YES in step S09TM2010), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If neither the first promotion effect nor the second promotion effect is being executed (NO in step S09TM2010), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether a power failure recovery flag, which will be described later, is set (step S09TM2020).

In this embodiment, the "power outage recovery flag" means that the effect control CPU 120 sends an effect control command (in this example, a power outage recovery designation command, etc.) that instructs recovery from a power outage shown in FIG. 3 (step S7). This is a type of flag that is set when receiving. If the timing at which this "power failure recovery flag" is set is when (1) the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, it will be erased at the timing when the variable display is finished, and (2) the special If the timing is any one of the timing when the fluctuating display of symbols is not being executed, the timing when a jackpot is being won, or the timing when a small hit is being won, it is erased at the timing when the next fluctuating display starts.

If the power failure recovery flag is not set (NO in step S09TM2020), the performance control CPU 120 determines to execute the first promotion performance (step S09TM2030), and ends the process.

If the power failure recovery flag is set (YES in step S09TM2020), the performance control CPU 120 determines to execute the second promotion performance (step S09TM2040), and ends the process as is.

[Promotion performance]
In this embodiment, when a small winning game is in progress, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a promotion performance that instructs the player to hit right in order to win a V prize (win in the V winning area 870). The promotion effect is a promotion flashing effect that promotes hitting right to win a V prize by blinking (lighting up) the V judgment winning device LED 87L, and a promotion sound effect is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R to cause a V win. This is a production including at least one of the following: a promotion sound effect production that promotes right-handed hitting, and a promotion image production that promotes right-handed hitting in order to win a V prize by displaying a promotion image on the image display device 5. .

In this embodiment, a first promotion effect and a second promotion effect can be executed as promotion effects. The first promotion performance and the second promotion performance are different in whether or not each performance is executed and in the performance mode. FIG. 9-13 is an explanatory diagram of a presentation mode table of promotion presentation showing an example of presentation mode of promotion presentation.

As shown in FIG. 9-13, the first promotion effect is the effect executed during the small winning game, which includes the first promotion blink effect, the promotion sound effect effect, and the promotion image effect among the promotion blink effects. This is a presentation including a first promotion image presentation.

The first promotion flashing effect is a performance that causes the V judgment winning device LED 87L to blink (light emit light) in rainbow colors (7 colors) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds. Further, the promotion sound effect is a production in which a promotion sound effect is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, the first promotion image effect is an effect that causes the image display device 5 to display the first promotion image. This first promotion image includes a first arrow image in the center of the screen that instructs you to hit right to win a V, the words "Aim for V" at the bottom left of the screen, and a small winning game state. This image includes an updatable time gauge image showing the remaining period. This first arrow image is an image with a rainbow color (7 colors) display mode, and is a moving image that performs an animation operation (see FIGS. 9-14). Furthermore, the characters "Aim for V" are also displayed in rainbow colors (7 colors) (see FIG. 9-14).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-13, the second promotion performance is a performance executed during the small winning game, and includes the second promotion flash performance among the promotion flash performances and the second promotion image performance among the promotion image performances. This is a production including a promotional image production.

The second promotional flashing performance is a performance that causes the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L to flash (light emit light) in red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds. Further, the second promotion image effect is an effect that causes the image display device 5 to display a second promotion image. This second promotion image is an image that includes a second arrow image at the center of the screen that instructs you to hit right to win the V, and the words "Please put the ball in the V" at the bottom center of the screen. be. This second arrow image has a white (one color) display mode and is a still image without animation operation (see FIGS. 9-15). Furthermore, the characters "Please put the ball in the V" are displayed in black (one color) image (see Figure 9-15).

[Example of first promotional performance]
FIG. 9-14 shows the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, the effect light emitted from the V judgment winning device LED 87L, and the effect sound reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, related to the first promotion effect. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (1), when it is decided to execute the first promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the first promotion effect (in this example, the first promotion flashing effect, The promotion sound effect production, the first promotion image production) are executed, the V judgment winning device LED 87L flashes (lights up) in rainbow colors (7 colors) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds, and the promotion sound effect is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. is reproduced and output, and the first promotion image (first arrow image 09TM11A, characters "Aim for V", time gauge image 09TM11T) is displayed on the image display device 5.

At this time, in the blinking cycle (0.5 seconds) of the first promotion blinking effect, it is the timing to turn off the V judgment winning device LED 87L, so the V judgment winning device LED 87L does not emit light. Further, as the first arrow image 09TM11A of the first promotion image, an image in the middle of an animation action (the first arrow image displayed only in the center left part of the screen) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (2), the performance control CPU 120 continues the first promotion performance (in this example, the first promotion blinking performance, the promotion sound effect performance, and the first promotion image performance). The LED 87L of the V judgment winning device blinks (lights up) in rainbow colors (7 colors) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds, the promotion sound effect is played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the first Display a promotional image.

At this time, in the blinking period (0.5 seconds) of the first promotion blinking effect, it is the timing to cause the V judgment winning device LED 87L to emit light, so the V judgment winning device LED 87L is emitting light in a rainbow color. Further, as the first arrow image 09TM11A of the first promotion image, an image in the middle of an animation operation (the first arrow image displayed in the entire center of the screen) is displayed.

[Example of second promotion performance]
FIG. 9-15 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the effect light emitted from the V judgment winning device LED 87L, which are related to the second promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 9-15 (1), when it is decided to execute the second promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the second promotion effect (in this example, the second promotion flashing effect, 2nd promotion image production) is executed, the V judgment prize winning device LED87L blinks (lights up) in red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds, and the second promotion image (second arrow image 09TM12A, second arrow image 09TM12A, Display the text "Please put the ball in V".

At this time, in the blinking period (2 seconds) of the first promotion blinking effect, it is the timing to turn off the V judgment winning device LED 87L, so the V judgment winning device LED 87L does not emit light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (2), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the second promotion performance (in this example, the second promotion blinking performance and the second promotion image performance), and makes a V determination. The winning device LED 87L is caused to blink (light emit light) in red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds, and the second promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5.

At this time, in the blinking period (2 seconds) of the second promotion blinking effect, it is the timing to cause the V judgment winning device LED 87L to emit light, so the V judgment winning device LED 87L is emitting red light. At this time, the second promotion image continues to be displayed in the same display mode as in FIG. 9-15(1).

In this embodiment, a jackpot occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 inside the V judgment winning device 87 (V winning) during the small winning gaming state, and the first promotion effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the V judgment winning device 87 and instruct the player to aim at the V judgment winning device 87 (hit to the right) to ensure a V winning (winning in the V winning area 870).

In addition, by executing the second promotion performance with a performance mode different from the first promotion performance, the situation is different from the normal small winning game (for example, if a power outage occurs during the small winning game state and the power is restored) This is a performance that is more urgent than the first promotion performance, by informing the player that a V-win has not occurred even though the remaining control period of the subsequent small winning game state is short, etc. V winning (V winning area 870), the player can be instructed to aim at the V judgment winning device 87 (to hit right).

[Performance determination process at the end of small hit]
FIG. 9-16 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed at the end of the small hit. The performance control CPU 120 executes the small hit end performance determination process shown in FIG. 9-16 in the small hit end performance process (step S175) of the performance control process shown in FIG. Specifically, upon receiving the small hit end designation command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance to be executed after the small hit ends (and the performance not to be executed) by the small hit end performance determination process shown in FIG. 9-16. do.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the V winning designation command has been received (step S09TM3010). That is, it is determined whether or not a V win has occurred during the small winning game.

When the V winning designation command is received (YES in step S09TM3010), that is, when a V winning has occurred in the small winning game, the production control CPU 120 terminates the jackpot game corresponding to the small winning. It is decided to display a small winning combination of decorative symbols as a combination of decorative symbols to be displayed later (step S09TM3020), and the process is ended as is.

The "small win combination of decorative symbols" that is determined to be displayed after a jackpot via a small win in step S09TM3020 is any one that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game (time-saving jackpot via a small win) corresponding to the small win. This is a combination of decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 on the start screen of the production mode (in this example, [rush mode], [hyper rush mode]).

For example, in the variable display that was executed immediately before being controlled to the small winning gaming state, a small winning combination of decorative symbols (for example, ``3V3'', etc.) corresponding to the display result being a ``small winning'' is displayed. , is displayed on the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (stop display, confirmed stop), and is controlled after the jackpot game state corresponding to the small win ends (in this example, [ [Rush Mode], [Hyper Rush Mode]), small winning combinations of decorative symbols (for example, "3V3", etc.) are displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

In this way, at the end of a small win, it is displayed on the start screen of one of the production modes (in this example, [Rush Mode], [Hyper Rush Mode]) that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state corresponding to the small win. By determining the combination of decorative symbols in advance, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to performance control at the start of any performance mode controlled after the end of a jackpot game state corresponding to a small win.

If the V winning designation command has not been received (NO in step S09TM3010), that is, if a small hit puncture has occurred during the small winning game, the performance control CPU 120 sets the power outage recovery flag. is set (step S09TM3030).

If the power failure recovery flag is not set (NO in step S09TM3030), the production control CPU 120 will display a jackpot combination of decorative symbols as a combination of decorative symbols to be displayed after the end of the small winning game. It is determined (step S09TM3040), and the process advances to step S09TM3050.

As shown in the explanation of step S09TM1070 of FIG. 9-9 and FIG. 9-10 (B2) described above, when the display result is a "small hit", the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display is When determining the combinations, a "jackpot combination of decorative symbols" is determined, and a "small winning combination of decorative symbols" corresponding to this jackpot combination of decorative symbols is determined.

The "decorative pattern jackpot combination" determined to be displayed after the small win ends in step S09TM3040 is the "decoration pattern jackpot combination" determined in advance together with the "decoration pattern jackpot combination" in step S09TM1070 of FIG. 9-9. A combination of symbols for a jackpot, and one of the performance modes (in this example, [rush mode], [ This is a combination of decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 on the start screen of the normal mode].

For example, in the variable display that was executed immediately before being controlled to the small winning gaming state, a small winning combination of decorative symbols (for example, ``3V3'', etc.) corresponding to the display result being a ``small winning'' is displayed. , is displayed (stopped display, confirmed stop) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and is controlled after the end of the corresponding small winning game state ([Rush mode], [Normal mode]) ), a jackpot combination of decorative symbols (for example, "333", etc.) corresponding to the small winning combination of decorative symbols is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

In this way, when a small hit puncture occurs at the end of a small win, one of the production modes (in this example, [Rush mode], [Normal mode]) that is controlled after the end of the small win game state starts. By determining in advance the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed on the screen, processing related to performance control at the start of any performance mode that is controlled after the end of the small winning game state in the event of a small winning puncture. It can reduce the burden.

After the process of step S09TM3040, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the third flag is set (step S09TM3050).

If the third flag is set (YES in step S09TM3050), the performance control CPU 120 advances the process to step S09TM3070.

If the third flag is not set (NO in step S09TM3050), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the remaining time saving control number is 0 (step S09TM3060).

If the remaining time saving control number is not 0 (NO in step S09TM3060), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the remaining time saving control number is 0 (YES in step S09TM3060), the performance control CPU 120 advances the process to step S09TM3070.

If the third flag is set (YES in step S09TM3050), or if the third flag is not set and the remaining time saving control number is 0 (YES in step S09TM3060), the production control The CPU 120 sets a result display flag, which will be described later (step S09TM3070), and ends the process.

In this embodiment, the "result display flag" means that when the small win ends, (A) the third flag is set and the V winning designation command is not received, or (B) the first flag or This is a kind of flag that is set when the V winning prize designation command is not received when the remaining time saving control number is 0 when the 2 flag is set. This "result display flag" is a flag indicating that a result display is displayed during the small win ED period, and is erased at the timing when the small win ED period ends.

In addition, after determining NO in step S09TM3010, if it is determined that the power failure recovery flag is set (YES in step S09TM3030), the performance control CPU 120 controls the decoration pattern displayed after the small hit ends. It is decided to display a special combination of decorative symbols as a combination (step S09TM3080), and the process is immediately terminated.

In this way, when the V prize designation command is not received and the power outage recovery flag is set (when proceeding to the process after step S09TM3080), the result display flag is set (step S09TM3070) As a result of not being executed, if a power outage occurs during the small winning game state and the power is turned on and the control is returned to the normal state without winning a V prize during the small winning gaming state, the result display flag will not be set. As a result, when the normal state is controlled in the above situation, the result display is not displayed on the image display device 5.

A result display is not displayed on the image display device 5 when a power outage occurs during the small winning game state and a small winning blowout occurs during the small winning gaming state after the power is turned on and the control is returned to the normal state. This can prevent the player's sense of regret from increasing. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which performance control that displays the result display after a power outage occurs and the power is turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the exact number of jackpots and the total number of awarded prize balls. It is possible to reduce the processing burden of effect control after the power is turned on, which is difficult to grasp.

The "special combination of decorative symbols" determined to be displayed after the small win ends in step S09TM3080 means that (X) the small win puncture occurs in the small win game when there is a power outage and power on during the small win game. of any production mode (in this example, [rush mode], [normal mode]) that is not controlled to the jackpot game state based on the occurrence of the small hit puncture, but is controlled after the small win game ends. On the start screen, a combination of decorative symbols that is different from the "small winning combination of decorative symbols" that is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 and determined in advance in step S09TM1070 of FIG. It is.

In addition, in this embodiment, this "special combination of decorative symbols" is different from the "combination for losing decorative symbols" or the "combination for jackpot of decorative symbols" described above, and the case (Y) described later. ) This is a combination of decorative patterns exclusively for the recovery start screen during a small winning game when there is a power outage and power on during a small winning game. In this example, when the "special combination of decorative symbols" is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, "135" decorative symbol combinations are displayed.

For example, in the variable display that was executed immediately before being controlled to the small winning gaming state, a small winning combination of decorative symbols (for example, ``3V3'', etc.) corresponding to the display result being a ``small winning'' is displayed. , is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (stopped display, fixed stop), (X) A small hit puncture occurs in the small win game, and a jackpot is achieved based on the occurrence of the small win puncture. On the start screen of any production mode ([rush mode], [normal mode]) that is not controlled by the gaming state and is controlled after the end of the small winning game, a special combination of decorative symbols (for example, "135") is displayed. , are displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

In this way, at the end of the small winning game, if a power outage occurs during the small winning game state and a small winning blowout occurs in this small winning game, any of the performance modes that are controlled after the small winning gaming state ends. (In this example, [Rush mode], [Normal mode]) By determining the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed on the start screen in advance, a power outage occurs during the small winning game state, and this small winning To reduce the processing load related to performance control at the start of any performance mode controlled after the end of a small win game state when a small win failure occurs in a game.

[Combination of decorative patterns when recovering from power outage]
In this embodiment, on the recovery start screen after the power is turned on, the combination of decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "initial rolls") is It shall vary depending on the gaming state when the occurrence occurs. In addition, in the following description, a case will be described in which the variable display of special symbols is not being executed when a power outage occurs.

The gaming state when the power outage occurs is a gaming state other than the small winning gaming state (normal state excluding the period of the small winning gaming state, time saving state excluding the period of the small winning gaming state, jackpot gaming state, etc.). In this case, on the recovery start screen after the power is turned on, the initial combination of decorative symbols (for example, "123") is displayed as the decorative symbol combination (initial roll) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Ru.

On the other hand, if the gaming state when the power outage occurred was the small winning gaming state, on the recovery start screen after the power is turned on (in the case of (Y) mentioned above), the symbol display areas 5L, 5C , 5R, a special combination of decorative symbols (for example, "135") is displayed as a decorative symbol combination (initial roll).

[Production control command]
In this embodiment, the production control command shown in the explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 of FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6 is adopted, and below, Among the adopted production control commands, production control commands whose names and contents have been changed will be explained.

<Design confirmation command>
The symbol confirmation designation command in this embodiment will be explained below. In this embodiment, a symbol confirmation designation command is set that specifies the end of the variable display of the first and second special symbols and the symbol confirmation period until the start of the next variable display.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of symbol confirmation designation commands are set as this symbol confirmation designation command. In the present embodiment, as examples of symbol confirmation designation commands, "symbol confirmation A specification command", "symbol confirmation B specification command", and "symbol confirmation C specification command" are set.

The "Symbol Confirmation A Designation Command" specifies that in variable displays other than the time-saving final variation display, the display result is "miss" to end the variable display, and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. This is a production control command.

"Symbol confirmation B designation command" is a production control command that specifies that in the variable display of the time saving final variation display, the display result is "miss" to end the variable display and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. It is.

The "symbol confirmation C designation command" is an effect control command that specifies that the variable display in which the display result is a "big hit" or "small win" is to be ended, and that the symbol confirmation period is 1 second.

<Jackpot start specification command>
The jackpot start designation command in this embodiment will be explained below. In this embodiment, a jackpot start designation command that specifies the start of a jackpot gaming state is set for each jackpot type shown in FIG. 9-2.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot start designation commands are set as this jackpot start designation command. In this embodiment, examples of jackpot start designation commands include "jackpot start A designation command", "jackpot start B designation command", "jackpot start C designation command", and "jackpot start D command" depending on the jackpot type. ``Specified command'' and ``Jackpot start E specified command'' are set.

<Jackpot end specification command>
The jackpot end designation command in this embodiment will be explained below. In this embodiment, a jackpot end designation command that designates the end of the jackpot gaming state is set for each jackpot type shown in FIG. 9-2.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot end designation commands are set as this jackpot end designation command. In this embodiment, as an example of the jackpot end designation command, there are "jackpot end A designation command", "jackpot end B designation command", "jackpot end C designation command", and "jackpot end D command" depending on the jackpot type. ``Specified command'' and ``Jackpot end E specified command'' are set.

<Small hit start specification command>
The small hit start designation command in this embodiment will be explained below. In this embodiment, a small win start designation command that specifies the start of a small win gaming state is set for each jackpot type shown in FIG. 9-2.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of small hit start designation commands are set as this small hit start designation command. In this embodiment, as an example of the small hit start designation command, depending on the jackpot type, there are "small hit start A specified command", "small hit start B specified command", and "small hit start C specified command", A "small hit start D designation command" and a "small win start E designation command" are set.

<Small winning end specification command>
The small hit end designation command in this embodiment will be explained below. In this embodiment, a small win end designation command that specifies the end of the small win gaming state is set for each jackpot type shown in FIG. 9-2.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of small hit end designation commands are set as this small hit end designation command. In this embodiment, as an example of the small hit end designation command, depending on the jackpot type, there are "small hit end A specified command", "small hit end B specified command", and "small hit end C specified command", A "small win end D designation command" and a "small win end E designation command" are set.

[Display timing of result display]
In this embodiment, the timing to start displaying the result display showing information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of awarded prize balls can be set to any of the following timings.
(A) Timing when the symbol confirmation designation command is received in the time saving final fluctuation (B) Timing when the small hit end designation command is received in the small hit corresponding to the time saving fluctuation In the following explanation, the gaming state is the time saving state (low accuracy / high accuracy) The variable display that is executed while being controlled in the base state is appropriately referred to as "time-saving variation" or "time-saving variation display." Further, when the gaming state is controlled to be a time saving state, a variable display executed when the remaining time saving control number becomes 0 is appropriately referred to as a "time saving final variation" or "time saving final variation display".

<(A) Timing when the symbol confirmation designation command is received in the time saving final variation>
(A) In this embodiment, in the time-saving final variation display where the display result is "miss", the performance control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation B designation command at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the special symbol, A result display is displayed on the display device 5. At this time, the production mode is controlled to be one of [Challenge Mode], [Rush Mode], and [Hyper Rush Mode].

Then, the production control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a result display over a symbol confirmation period (10 seconds) that is set based on receiving the symbol confirmation B designation command. In addition, if there is one or more pending memories (variable displays whose execution is pending (up to 4 in this example)) corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred before the time saving final variable display ends, the pending memory A result display is displayed on an image display device 5 over a period in which a variable display corresponding to is executed and a pattern determination period corresponding to the pending storage.

<Time chart related to (A)>
FIG. 9-17 is a time chart showing the timing of displaying the result display in case (A) described above. In this example, the display result of the time saving final variation display is "lost", and there are 4 pending memories (variable displays whose execution is pending) corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred before the time saving final variation display ended. , shows an example in which a result display is displayed when both display results are "miss".

In the time-saving final variation display where the display result is "miss", the CPU 103 receives the symbol confirmation B designation command at the timing to end the variation display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 9-17). The CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a result display.

Next, after the symbol confirmation period (10 seconds) has elapsed, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the next second special symbol (the variable display corresponding to the first pending memory among the four pending memories) (Fig. At timing T2A shown in 9-17), the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to continue displaying the result display.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T2B shown in FIG. 9-17), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation A designation command, displays the result on the image display device 5. Continue to display.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the results on the image display device 5 in the same way regarding the variable display corresponding to the second, third, and fourth pending memories among the four pending memories. Display.

Next, at the timing when the symbol determination period (0.5 seconds) of the variable display corresponding to the fourth pending memory has elapsed (timing T6 shown in FIG. 9-17), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5. Clear the result display from

In this embodiment, the image is displayed for a total of 1.5 seconds, including a variable display period (1 second) of the pending memory in which the display result is "miss" and a symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) corresponding to the variable display. A result display is displayed on the display device 5. In this example, since the number of pending memories is 4, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for 1.5×4=6 seconds (period from T2A to T6 shown in FIG. 9-17). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the result display is displayed over a period that is the sum of the symbol confirmation period (10 seconds) and 1.5 x number of pending memories (0 to 4) = 0 to 6 seconds.

<(B) Timing when the small hit end designation command is received for the small hit corresponding to time-saving fluctuations>
(B) In this embodiment, (B-1) a time-saving final variation display in which the display result is a "small win" when the production mode is [Challenge Mode] or [Rush Mode], and (B-2) Production When the mode is [Hyper Rush Mode], a small win puncture occurs in a small win game corresponding to the time-saving variable display in which the display result is a "small win" (that is, the result display flag is set), and the CPU 103 At the timing of ending the small winning game, the performance control CPU 120 which has received the small winning end designation command causes the image display device 5 to display a result display.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays the result on the image display device 5 over the small win ED period (3 seconds) based on the fact that the result display flag is set and the small win end designation command is received. Display. In addition, pending memory (execution is pending (up to 4 in this example) corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred until the end of the last variable display (previous variable display) when the time saving state is controlled is completed. If there is one or more variable displays (variable display), the image display device 5 is displayed during the period in which the variable display corresponding to the suspended memory is being executed (variable display period) and the symbol confirmation period corresponding to the variable display. Display the result display.

<Time chart related to (B)>
FIG. 9-18 is a time chart showing the timing of displaying the result display in the case (B) described above. In this example, when the above-mentioned (B-1) performance mode is [Challenge Mode] or [Rush Mode], a small win occurs in a small win game corresponding to the time-saving final variable display where the display result is a "small win". There are four pending memories (variable displays whose execution is pending) that correspond to starting winnings that occurred after a puncture occurred (result display flag is set) and before the end of the time-saving final variable display. An example is shown in which a result display is displayed when the display result is also a "miss".

In the time-saving final variation display where the display result is a "small hit", the CPU 103 receives the symbol confirmation C designation command at the timing at which the special symbol variation display ends (timing T1 shown in Figure 9-18). The CPU 120 does not cause the image display device 5 to display the result display.

Next, after the symbol confirmation period (1 second) has elapsed, at the timing when the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the small winning gaming state (timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-18), the production control controller that has received the small winning start designation command The CPU 120 does not cause the image display device 5 to continue displaying the results.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the control of the small winning game state (timing T3 shown in FIG. 9-18), the performance control CPU 120 that receives the small winning end designation command has the result display flag set. Based on this, a result display is displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, the small win ED period (3 seconds) has elapsed, the CPU 103 ends the small win game state, and displays the next variable display of the second special symbol (corresponding to the first pending memory among the four pending memories). At the timing (timing T4A shown in FIG. 9-18) to start the variable display), the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to continue displaying the result display.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T4B shown in FIG. 9-18), the production control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation A designation command, displays the result on the image display device 5. Continue to display.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the results on the image display device 5 in the same way regarding the variable display corresponding to the second, third, and fourth pending memories among the four pending memories. Display.

Next, at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) of the variable display corresponding to the fourth pending memory has elapsed (timing T8 shown in FIG. 9-18), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5. Clear the result display from

In this embodiment, the image is displayed for a total of 1.5 seconds, including a variable display period (1 second) of the pending memory in which the display result is "miss" and a symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) corresponding to the variable display. A result display is displayed on the display device 5. In this example, since the number of pending memories is 4, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for 1.5×4=6 seconds (period from T4A to T8 shown in FIG. 9-18). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the result display is displayed over a period that is the sum of the small winning ending period (3 seconds) and 1.5 x number of pending memories (0 to 4) = 0 to 6 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, when the control is returned to the normal state after a short-time break or a small hit puncture, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for a certain period of time (symbol confirmation period, By being displayed over the small winning ending period), the player can accurately recognize information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of awarded prize balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example was shown in which the small hit end designation command is set as the small hit end A designation command to the small hit end E designation command. A hit end designation command may be set.

For example, if a V win has not occurred at the end of the small win, the CPU 103 sets a flag indicating that a small win has occurred, and sends a special small win end F designation command when a small win has occurred. You may. This small win end F designation command is a type of performance control command that specifies that the small win game state has ended and that the small win ending period is 10 seconds. The 10 seconds of the small winning ending period specified by this small winning ending F specified command is longer than the small winning ending period at the end of the normal small winning gaming state, and the result is displayed during the small winning ending period. This is the period in which it becomes possible.

[Variation example of whether results are displayed]
In addition, in the above embodiment, (B-1) a time-saving final variation display in which the display result is a "small win" when the production mode is [Challenge Mode] or [Rush Mode], and (B-2) production When the mode is [Hyper Rush Mode], a small hit puncture occurs in a small winning game corresponding to the time-saving variable display in which the display result is "small winning", and the CPU 103 terminates the small winning game. The effect control CPU 120 that has received the winning end designation command displays the result display on the image display device 5 as an example, but is not limited to this form, and may also correspond to (B-1) or (B-2). When a small hit puncture occurs in a small winning game, the result display may not be displayed on the image display device 5 at any timing. In this case, by configuring the system so that the result display flag is not set in step S09TM3070, it is possible to prevent the result display from being displayed.

For example, (B-1) When the performance mode is [Challenge Mode] or [Rush Mode], a small win puncture occurs in a small win game that corresponds to the time-saving final variable display where the display result is "small win". (The result display flag is not set), there are four pending memories (variable displays whose execution is pending) corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred before the end of the time saving final variable display, and all display results are " In the case of "Lose", the performance control CPU 120 does not display the result display on the image display device 5 during the small winning ending period or the variable display period corresponding to the pending memory.

[Variation example of display timing of result display]
In this embodiment, when a small hit puncture occurs and the result display flag is set, the timing to start displaying the result display showing information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of award balls awarded is ( B) An example was shown in which the small win corresponding to time-saving fluctuations can be set at the timing when the small win end designation command is received, but it is not limited to this type of case, and the small win puncture occurs and the result display flag is set. In this case, the timing to start displaying the result display may be set to a timing different from (B).

For example, when a small hit puncture occurs and the result display flag is set, the timing to start displaying the result display showing information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of prize balls awarded is as follows: Can be set.
(C) Timing of receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the first fluctuation display after the end of the small hit

<(C) Timing at which the fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the first fluctuation display after the small hit is received>
(C) In this embodiment, (C-1) Time-saving final variation display where the display result is "small win" when the production mode is [Challenge mode] or [Rush mode], and (C-2) Production When the mode is [Hyper Rush Mode], a small win puncture occurs in a small win game corresponding to the time-saving variable display in which the display result is a "small win" (that is, the result display flag is set), and the CPU 103 Suspended memory (variable whose execution is suspended (maximum of 4 in this example)) corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred until the end of the small winning game and the last variable display when controlled in the time saving state ends display), at the timing to start the variable display corresponding to the first suspended memory, the performance control CPU 120 that has received the variable pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display, starts the image display. A result display is displayed on the device 5.

Then, based on the fact that the result display flag is set and the fact that the fluctuation pattern designation command is received, the performance control CPU 120 determines the fluctuation display period and the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) corresponding to the fluctuation display. ), the result display is displayed on the image display device 5. Similarly, the period during which the variable display corresponding to the remaining pending memory corresponding to the starting winning that occurred until the end of the last variable display when controlled in the time saving state is executed, and the variable display corresponds to A result display is displayed on the image display device 5 over the symbol determination period.

<Time chart related to (C)>
FIG. 9-19 is a time chart showing the timing of displaying the result display in case (C) described above. In this example, when the above-mentioned (C-1) performance mode is [Challenge Mode] or [Rush Mode], a small win occurs in a small win game that corresponds to the time-saving final variable display where the display result is a "small win". There are four pending memories (variable displays whose execution is pending) that correspond to the starting winnings that occurred before the puncture occurred (result display flag was set) and the time-saving final variable display ended. An example is shown in which a result display is displayed when the result is also a "miss".

In the time-saving final variation display where the display result is a "small hit", the CPU 103 receives the symbol confirmation C designation command at the timing when it ends the variation display of the special symbol (timing T1 shown in Figure 9-19). The CPU 120 does not cause the image display device 5 to display the result display.

Next, after the symbol confirmation period (1 second) has elapsed, at the timing when the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the small winning gaming state (timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-19), the production control controller that has received the small winning start designation command The CPU 120 does not cause the image display device 5 to continue displaying the results.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the control of the small winning game state (timing T3 shown in FIG. 9-19), the performance control CPU 120 that has received the small winning end designation command displays the result on the image display device 5. Do not display.

Next, the small win ED period (3 seconds) has elapsed, the CPU 103 ends the small win game state, and displays the next variable display of the second special symbol (corresponding to the first pending memory among the four pending memories). At the timing (timing T4A shown in FIG. 9-19) to start the variable display), the performance control CPU 120 receives the variable pattern designation command, and based on the result display flag being set, the image display device 5 display the results display.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T4B shown in FIG. 9-19), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation A designation command, displays the result on the image display device 5. Continue to display.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the results on the image display device 5 in the same way regarding the variable display corresponding to the second, third, and fourth pending memories among the four pending memories. Display.

Next, at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) of the variable display corresponding to the fourth pending memory has elapsed (timing of T8 shown in FIG. 9-19), the performance control CPU 120 displays the image. The result display is erased from the device 5.

In this embodiment, the image is displayed for a total of 1.5 seconds, including a variable display period (1 second) of the pending memory in which the display result is "miss" and a symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) corresponding to the variable display. A result display is displayed on the display device 5. In this example, since the number of pending memories is 4, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for 1.5×4=6 seconds (period from T4A to T8 shown in FIG. 9-19). Therefore, in this embodiment, the result display is displayed over a period of 1.5 x number of pending memories (0 to 4) = 0 to 6 seconds.

Here, when the number of pending memories is 0, since there is no pending memory, the CPU 103 has not sent the fluctuation pattern designation command to the production control CPU 120. In this modification example in which display control of the result display is started based on receiving the variation pattern designation command, the performance control CPU 120 that has not received the variation pattern designation command cannot start displaying the result display. In this case, the result display may be displayed during a predetermined period after the small win ending period (such as a period until the next variable display starts while waiting for a customer).

In this embodiment, the result display is a common performance mode in any of the cases (A) to (C) described above. In other words, the result display displayed during the symbol confirmation period and small winning ending period corresponding to the time saving final variation, and the result display displayed during the variation display period and symbol confirmation period corresponding to the pending memory, have a common production mode. be. In this example, the result display includes the characters "FEVER x X" indicating the number of jackpots (X = number of jackpots) and the characters "TOTAL YYYYpt" indicating the total number of awarded prize balls (YYYY = awarded prize balls). ) (see Figure 9-25 (19)).

In this embodiment, if the display result is either a "big hit" or "small win" in the remaining 1st to 4th rotations of the challenge mode or rush mode, the remaining 1st to 4th rotations of the hyper rush mode The fluctuation pattern may be determined using the same fluctuation pattern determination table [for jackpot/small win] as in the case where the display result is either "big hit" or "small hit" in the rotation.

In this case, regardless of which production mode is Challenge Mode, Rush Mode, or Hyper Rush Mode, if the display result is either "Jackpot" or "Small Win" in the remaining 1st to 4th spins, , a result performance is executed in which a result display showing information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of prize balls awarded is executed, and a revival performance is executed in which a shooting star is displayed on the result display.

Therefore, in this embodiment, where the result display is a common performance mode regardless of the situation, even if the result display is displayed in any of cases (A) to (C), a shooting star will be displayed on the result display. It is possible to make the player expect that the revival effect will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest when the result display is displayed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, if there are 0 pending memories (variable displays whose execution is pending) corresponding to starting winnings that have occurred until the end of the time saving final variable display, the result display may be displayed. Although we have shown an example in which this is possible, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and there are 0 pending memories (variable displays whose execution is pending) corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred before the end of the time-saving final variable display. In some cases, display of result displays may be restricted.

For example, when there are 0 pending memories (variable displays whose execution is pending) corresponding to starting winnings that occur before the end of the time-saving final variable display, the result display is not displayed during the small winning ending period. In this case, since there are 0 pending memories, a variable display corresponding to the pending memory will not be executed, and the display result will not be a "big hit" or "small win" and a revival effect will not be executed. By displaying the result display, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting a revival effect to be executed.

[Customer waiting demonstration performance]
In this embodiment, when the special figure game or the like is not being executed, if the execution conditions for the customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIGS. 9-20 and 9-21 (A)), which will be described later, are satisfied, the image display device 5 It is possible to perform a customer waiting demonstration performance in which a demonstration display is displayed.
In this example, the demo display includes the characters "DEMO" and a notification image (in this example, an image displaying the characters "P Fever XXX" (the name of the gaming machine)).

[Demo display performance determination process]
FIGS. 9-20 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process that is executed while waiting until the variable display starts (hereinafter referred to as "waiting for customers", "waiting for customers", etc.). The performance control CPU 120 executes the demonstration display performance determination process shown in FIGS. 9-20 in the variable display start waiting process (step S170) of the performance control process shown in FIG. Specifically, upon receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance to be performed (and the performance not to be performed) while waiting for the customer through the demonstration display performance determination process shown in FIGS. 9-20.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed (step S09TM4010). If the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed (YES in step 09TM4010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the customer waiting demonstration effect is not being executed (NO in step S09TM4010), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step S09TM4020). If the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not been received (NO in step S09TM4020), the production control CPU 120 ends the process.

When the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received (YES in step S09TM4020), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the execution conditions for the customer waiting demonstration performance are satisfied, based on the execution condition table for the customer waiting demonstration performance (Fig. 9-21(A)) (step S09TM4030). If the conditions for executing the customer waiting demonstration performance are not satisfied (NO in step S09TM4030), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the execution conditions for the customer waiting demonstration performance are satisfied (YES in step S09TM4030), the performance control CPU 120 determines to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance and ends the process.

<Execution conditions table for customer waiting demonstration production>
FIG. 9-21(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution condition table for the customer waiting demonstration performance. As shown in Figure 9-21 (A), the execution condition table for the customer waiting demonstration performance includes the condition number (Condition No.) and the execution condition for the customer waiting demonstration performance (power failure recovery flag) corresponding to this number. (presence of set or not, waiting time for customers) are stored in association with each other. The customer waiting time is the elapsed time when there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer.
Hereinafter, each condition number and the execution condition of the customer waiting demonstration performance corresponding to this condition number will be explained in detail.

(Condition No. “SP-01”)
Condition No. In "SP-01", the execution conditions for the customer waiting demonstration performance are that the setting of the power outage recovery flag is "(the power outage recovery flag) is not set" and the customer waiting time is "60 seconds or more". is set to .
That is, when the power failure recovery flag is not set and the customer waiting time has elapsed for 60 seconds, this condition No. "SP-01" is established.

(Condition No. "SP-02")
Condition No. In "SP-02", the execution conditions for the customer waiting demonstration performance are that the power failure recovery flag is set (the power failure recovery flag) is set, and the customer waiting time is ``10 seconds or more''. is set to .
That is, when the power failure recovery flag is set and the customer waiting time has elapsed for 10 seconds, this condition No. "SP-02" is established.

In this way, the customer waiting time until the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed when there is a power outage immediately before is the same as the customer waiting time until the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed when there is no power outage immediately before. It can be set to a period shorter than the waiting time, and an appropriate period can be set as the period until the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed.

[Recovery notification performance]
In this embodiment, when the power is restored from the power outage, it is possible to execute a recovery notification effect that displays a recovery display notifying that the power has been restored from the power outage. The recovery display is an image that is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 and includes the words "Recovering from power outage".

In this embodiment, the recovery display is an image that has a higher display priority than various effect images (background images, decorative patterns, etc.). Furthermore, the second promotion image displayed when the game recovers from the power outage during a small win is an image that has a higher display priority than the recovery display. Therefore, it appears to the player that the second promotion image, recovery display, and various effect images are displayed in this order. However, in this example, since the display area for the recovery display is the entire screen of the image display device 5, it is difficult to visually recognize the various effect images (see FIG. 9-27 (2)). Here, "high display priority" means, for example, that the display layer is at a higher level and appears to be displayed in the foreground.

In this embodiment, when the power is turned on after a power outage (recovery from a power outage), a command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 in the process (step S7) of transmitting a command at the time of recovery of the game control main process shown in FIG. Among the production control commands that instruct recovery from a power outage, the gaming state at the time of recovery (hereinafter referred to as , appropriately referred to as the "gaming state at the time of restoration"), the execution period of the restoration notification effect can be varied (see FIG. 9-21(B)).

<Execution period determination table for recovery notification performance>
FIG. 9-21(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution period determination table for the recovery notification effect. As shown in FIG. 9-21(B), in this embodiment, the execution period of the recovery notification performance is determined according to the gaming state at the time of recovery.

When the gaming state at the time of restoration is a "small winning gaming state", the execution period of the restoration notification performance is determined to be "0.5 seconds or less".

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state at the time of recovery is the "small winning gaming state", the execution period of the recovery notification effect is "0.5 seconds or less", and in this embodiment, the gaming state is controlled to the small winning gaming state when the power is restored. If the remaining control period (hereinafter referred to as the "remaining small winning period") is 0.5 seconds or more, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is determined to be 0.5 seconds, and when the power outage is restored, If the remaining small winning period is 0.5 seconds or less, the execution period of the recovery notification performance is determined to be "(remaining small winning period - 0.004) seconds". For example, when the remaining small winning period is 0.3 seconds when the power is restored, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is determined to be "(0.3-0.004)=0.296 seconds".

Therefore, in this embodiment, if the gaming state at the time of power outage recovery is the small winning gaming state, no matter which period the remaining small winning period is, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is the remaining small winning period. is set to a shorter period. That is, before the small winning game state at the time of power failure recovery ends, the recovery notification performance ends and the display of the recovery display also ends.

When the gaming state at the time of restoration is a "gaming state other than the small winning gaming state", the execution period of the restoration notification performance is determined to be "5 seconds". The "gaming state other than the small winning gaming state" is the "normal state excluding the period of the small winning gaming state" and the "big winning gaming state".

[Example of production when V winning occurs or small hit blowout occurs]
Next, an explanation will be given of production examples when a V winning occurs and when a small hit puncture occurs, using FIGS. 9-22 to 9-25.

Figure 9-22 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to when a V winning occurs and when a small hit puncture occurs, and Figures 9-23 to 9-25 show the execution timing of each effect when a V winning occurs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect image related to when a small hit puncture occurs.

In this example, when the performance mode is controlled to [rush mode], a variable display of the second special symbol whose display result is a "small win" is executed, and in a small win game corresponding to this variable display, V It is assumed that a prize is won and a jackpot game is played in which the jackpot type via small win is "11 (10) R time saving jackpot via small win (99 times)". After that, when the production mode is controlled to [Hyper Rush Mode], a variable display of the second special symbol whose display result is a "small win" is executed, and a small win is achieved in the small win game corresponding to this variable display. It is assumed that a blowout occurs and a result display is displayed without a jackpot game being played.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the symbol on the image display device 5 at the timing (timing T1 shown in FIG. 9-22) when the ready-to-reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. A ready-to-win state is established by stopping and displaying decorative symbols including the character "C" and the number "3" in the area 5L and the symbol display area 5R. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display small symbols in a variable manner. That is, the small symbols are also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the ornamental symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the ornamental symbols are stopped and displayed. The variable display continues without being displayed.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the active display area 09TM03E to display an active display 09TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first pending memory number display area 09TM05E and displays "0" in the second pending memory number display area 09TM06E.

At this time, based on the fact that the production mode is [Rush Mode], the performance control CPU 120 displays the words "Rush Mode" at the top center of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the characters "Rush Mode" at the top left of the screen of the image display device 5. In response to the fact that the number of remaining time-saving controls is 5, the characters ``5 remaining'' are displayed. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 displays a third promotion image at the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. This third promotion image is an image that includes the characters "Right hit" and a third arrow image 09TM13A that instructs to hit right in order to win the second starting prize opening or win the V prize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (2), at the timing when the operation promotion display 09TM31B in the variable pattern should be displayed (timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5. An operation promotion display 09TM31B is displayed in the center of the screen to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (3), at the timing when the push button 31B is operated by the player (timing T3 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120 executes the symbol stop action performance. Then, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, take action on the small winning combination of decorative symbols that will result in a "jackpot" (in this example, the decorative symbol containing the character "C" and the number "3", the character " A decorative pattern containing the letter "V" and the alphabet "V" and a decorative pattern containing the character "C" and the number "3" are enlarged and moved), a pattern stop sound effect is executed, and a pattern stop effect is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Play and output the sound. At this time, variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T4 shown in FIG. 9-22), the production control receives the symbol confirmation C designation command. The CPU 120 finishes the symbol stop action performance, finishes the action of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and selects the final small winning combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "3V3"). A fixed stop is made, the symbol stop sound performance is ended, and the reproduction output of the symbol stop sound effect is ended from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "3V3") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 09TM03 is erased from the active display area 09TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (5), when the CPU 103 starts the small winning game state (period from T5 to T6 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120 starts the first promotion performance (main In the example, the first promotion flashing effect, promotion sound effect effect, and first promotion image effect) are executed, and the V judgment winning device LED 87L blinks (lights up) in rainbow colors (7 colors) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds. , the speakers 8L and 8R reproduce and output the promotion sound effect, and the image display device 5 displays the first promotion image (first arrow image 09TM11A, characters "Aim for V", time gauge image 09TM11T). At this time, as the first arrow image 09TM11A of the first promotion image, an image in the middle of an animation action (the first arrow image displayed in the entire center of the screen) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (6), when the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened during the small winning game, the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and the game ball is won during the predetermined validity period. At the timing when a game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a (timing T6 shown in FIG. 9-22), the production control CPU 120 starts some productions (promotional sound effect production, first promotion sound effect, etc.) of the first promotion production. Among the promotion image effects, the first arrow image and the text "Aim for V" are finished, and at the same time, a V prize occurrence notification display (in this example, "V GET") is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. characters) are displayed.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the small winning game state (timing T7 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120 executes the small winning ending performance determination process (see FIG. 9-16). It is decided to display a small winning combination of decorative symbols as a combination of decorative symbols to be displayed after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the winning (step S09TM3020).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (7), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (at timing T8 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120 receives the jackpot start designation command, The characters "MAX FEVER" are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the type of jackpot via small hit is "11 (10) R time saving jackpot via small hit".

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the jackpot gaming state (timing T9 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120 receives the jackpot end designation command, During the jackpot ending period, the entire screen of the image display device 5 is displayed with a caption display 09TM20 containing the words "HYPER" and the words "Battle Rush" to inform that the production mode to be controlled next is [Hyper Rush Mode]. to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (9), at the timing when the jackpot ending period ends (timing T10 shown in FIG. 9-22), the production control CPU 120 controls the production mode to [hyper rush mode]. Then, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the small winning combination (in this example, "3V3") of the decorative symbols determined in the small winning ending performance determination process is displayed. At this time, a combination of small symbols (in this example, "3V3") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the active display 09TM03 in the active display area 09TM03E in response to the fact that the variable display is not currently being executed. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first pending memory number display area 09TM05E and displays "0" in the second pending memory number display area 09TM06E.

At this time, based on the fact that the production mode is [Hyper Rush Mode], the production control CPU 120 displays the words "Hyper Rush Mode" at the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the words "Hyper Rush Mode" on the screen of the image display device 5. A telop display containing the word "HYPER" is displayed at the upper right and lower left of the screen. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 displays a third promotion image at the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. This third promotion image is an image that includes the characters "Right hit" and a third arrow image 09TM13A that instructs to hit right in order to win the second starting prize opening or win the V prize.

In this embodiment, when the production mode is [hyper rush mode], information related to the number of remaining time saving controls is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. This is because when the performance mode is [Hyper Rush Mode], in this configuration where the next "big hit" or "small hit" is virtually determined, displaying the number of remaining time reductions will eliminate the trouble for the player. This is to prevent the players from feeling the same and reducing the interest in the game.

As shown in Figures 9-23 (3) and (4), decorations corresponding to the display result becoming "small win" in the variable display that was executed immediately before being controlled to the small win gaming state. "3V3" is displayed (stopped display, confirmed stop) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 as a small winning combination of symbols, and as shown in FIG. 9-24 (9), the corresponding On the start screen of the performance mode (in this example, [Hyper Rush Mode]) that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state corresponding to the small hit, "3V3" is the small winning combination of decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5. It is displayed in display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In this embodiment, each variable display is appropriately referred to as a "variable display (time saving Nth rotation)" depending on the number of rotations of the variable display executed under control of the time saving state. For example, if the number of rotations of a variable display that is executed under control of the time saving state is "1st rotation", that variable display is called a "variable display (1st rotation of time saving)" and is executed under the control of the time saving state. When the number of rotations of the variable display executed is "seventh rotation", the variable display is referred to as "variable display (time saving seventh rotation)".

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (10), a new starting prize is generated in the second starting winning hole (variable winning ball device 6B), and the CPU 103 displays the second special prize whose display result is "lost". When the variable display of the symbols (time saving first rotation) is started, the performance control CPU 120 displays the ornaments in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display of symbols is started (timing T11 shown in FIG. 9-22). At this time, variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 newly displays an active display 09TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area 09TM03E.

In this example, during the period when this variable display is being executed, two new start winnings are made to the second starting winning hole (variable winning ball device 6B) (the display result for both pending memories is "lost"). Then, the second pending memory number becomes "2", "2" is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 09TM06E, and two second pending displays 09TM02 are displayed in the second pending display area 09TM02E. do.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (11), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (time-saving first rotation) (timing T12 shown in FIG. 9-22), the symbol confirmation A designation is performed. The performance control CPU 120 that received the command finalizes and stops the final decorative pattern losing combination (in this example, "142") in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "142") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 09TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is erased from the active display area 09TM03E.

Next, after the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the second special symbol (time saving 2nd rotation, time saving 3rd rotation), as shown in FIG. When a starting winning occurs in the device 6B) and the CPU 103 starts variable display of the second special symbol (time saving 4th rotation) where the display result is a "small win", the performance control CPU 120 issues a variable pattern designation command. Based on the specified variation pattern, variable display of decorative symbols is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (timing T13 shown in FIG. 9-22). At this time, variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 newly displays an active display 09TM03 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area 09TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (13), the performance control CPU 120 changes the symbol display on the image display device 5 at the timing when the ready-to-reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established (timing T14 shown in FIG. 9-22). A ready-to-win state is established by stopping and displaying decorative symbols including the character "B" and the number "2" in the area 5L and the symbol display area 5R. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display small symbols in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (14), at the timing when the operation promotion display 09TM31B in the variable pattern should be displayed (timing T15 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5. An operation promotion display 09TM31B is displayed in the center of the screen to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (15), at the timing when the push button 31B is operated by the player (timing T16 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120 executes the symbol stop action performance. Then, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, take action on the small winning combination of decorative symbols that will result in a "jackpot" (in this example, the decorative symbol containing the character "B" and the number "2", the character " A decorative pattern containing the letter "V" and the alphabet "V" and a decorative pattern containing the character "B" and the number "2" are enlarged and moved), a pattern stop sound effect is executed, and a pattern stop effect is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Play and output the sound. At this time, variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (16), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T17 shown in FIG. 9-22), the effect control receives the symbol confirmation C designation command. The CPU 120 finishes the symbol stop action performance, finishes the action of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and selects the final small winning combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "2V2"). A fixed stop is made, the symbol stop sound performance is ended, and the reproduction output of the symbol stop sound effect is ended from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "2V2") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 09TM03 is erased from the active display area 09TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (17), when the CPU 103 starts the small winning game state (period from T18 to T19 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120 starts the first promotion performance (main In the example, the first promotion flashing effect, promotion sound effect effect, and first promotion image effect) are executed, and the V judgment winning device LED 87L blinks (lights up) in rainbow colors (7 colors) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds. , the speakers 8L and 8R reproduce and output the promotion sound effect, and the image display device 5 displays the first promotion image (first arrow image 09TM11A, characters "Aim for V", time gauge image 09TM11T). At this time, as the first arrow image 09TM11A of the first promotion image, an image in the middle of an animation action (the first arrow image displayed in the entire center of the screen) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (18), at a predetermined timing (timing T19 shown in FIG. 9-22) at which a small winning end suggestion display to be described later should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device. A small win end suggestion display 09TM30 (in this example, an image with a display format in which the screen appears to be cracked) is displayed on the entire screen of No. Display. This small hit end suggestion display is an image that has a higher display priority (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground) than various performance images (first promotion images, etc.) related to the small win game. be. Therefore, from the player's perspective, it appears that the small winning end suggestion display and the various performance images related to the small winning game are displayed in this order.

In this embodiment, the "predetermined timing at which the small win end suggestion display should be displayed" is set to one second before the control of the small win game state ends. Therefore, even during the period when the small winning end suggestion display is displayed, the gaming state is controlled to be a small winning gaming state, and the player can win a V prize, albeit for a short time. Since such a form is adopted, even during the period when the small winning end suggestion display is displayed, the third promotion image (the characters "Right hit", the third Arrow image 09TM13A) is displayed.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the small winning game state (timing T20 shown in FIG. 9-22), the performance control CPU 120 executes the small winning ending performance determination process (see FIG. 9-16). It is decided to display a jackpot combination of decorative symbols as a combination of decorative symbols to be displayed after the winning game ends (step S09TM3040), and a result display flag is set (step S09TM3070).

As shown in FIG. 9-25 (19), the production control CPU 120 that has received the small hit end designation command determines the small hit ending period (as shown in FIG. 9-22) based on the result display flag being set. During the period from T20 to T21), results are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "FEVER x 2" indicating the number of jackpots and the characters "TOTAL 1950pt" indicating the total number of prize balls awarded) are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. characters) are displayed.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the first promotional performance (in this example, the first promotional flashing performance, the promotional sound effect, and the first promotional image performance), and causes the V judgment winning device LED 87L to blink (light emit light). Then, the reproduction output of the promoting sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is ended, and the first promoting image is erased from the image display device 5.

In addition, in this example, since there are 0 pending memories corresponding to the starting winnings that occurred before the end of the last variable display (time saving 4th rotation) when the time saving state is controlled, the small winning ending period The result display will only be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (20), at the timing when the small winning ending period ends (timing T21 shown in FIG. 9-22), the production control CPU 120 changes the production mode to [normal mode (sunny mode)]. )], and in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the combination of decorative symbols for the jackpot ("222" in this example) determined in the performance determination process at the end of the small win is displayed. At this time, a combination of small symbols ("222" in this example) is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, based on the fact that the production mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)], the sunny background image 09TM60A is displayed on the image display device 5 as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, since the symbol stop action performance is not executed, no action is performed on the combination of decorative symbols, and because the symbol stop sound performance is not executed, the symbol stop sound effect is not reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, when the control is changed to [Normal Mode] via a small hit puncture, the symbol stop action effect and the symbol stop sound effect are not executed, leading to the misunderstanding that an event advantageous to the player is occurring. However, it is possible to prevent the player's feeling of regret from increasing afterwards.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the active display 09TM03 in the active display area 09TM03E in response to the fact that the variable display is not currently being executed. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first pending memory number display area 09TM05E and displays "0" in the second pending memory number display area 09TM06E.

As shown in Figures 9-24 (15) and (16), decorations corresponding to the display result becoming "small win" in the variable display that was executed immediately before being controlled to the small win gaming state. "2V2" is displayed as a small winning combination of symbols in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of image display device 5 (stop display, confirmed stop). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (20), on the start screen of the performance mode (in this example, [normal mode]) that is controlled after the end of the small winning game state, the decorative symbols are displayed as a combination of decorative symbols. The jackpot combination "222" is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

[Example of production when the power goes out during a small hit, and a small hit puncture occurs after restoration]
Next, an example of performance when a power outage occurs during a small winning game and when a small winning blowout occurs after recovery will be described using FIGS. 9-26 to 9-27.

FIG. 9-26 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance related to when a power outage occurs during a small winning game and when a small winning puncture occurs after recovery. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to when a power outage occurs during a winning game and when a small winning puncture occurs after recovery.

In this example, it is assumed that a power outage occurs in the small winning game state controlled during the [hyper rush mode], and a small winning puncture occurs in the small winning gaming state that is controlled again after the power is turned on.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-27(1), when the CPU 103 starts the small winning game state (period T1 to T2 shown in FIG. 9-26), the performance control CPU 120 starts the first promotional performance (main In the example, the first promotion flashing effect, promotion sound effect effect, and first promotion image effect) are executed, and the V judgment winning device LED 87L blinks (lights up) in rainbow colors (7 colors) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds. , the speakers 8L and 8R reproduce and output the promotion sound effect, and the image display device 5 displays the first promotion image (first arrow image 09TM11A, characters "Aim for V", time gauge image 09TM11T). At this time, as the first arrow image 09TM11A of the first promotion image, an image in the middle of an animation action (the first arrow image displayed in the entire center of the screen) is displayed.

Next, at timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-26, a power outage occurs while the small winning game state is being controlled, and at timing T3 shown in FIG. 9-26, the power is turned on.

At this time, since the gaming state when the power outage occurs is the small winning gaming state, the symbol display areas 5L, 5C are , 5R, a special combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135") is displayed as a decorative symbol combination (initial roll).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (2), after recovery from the power outage, the CPU 103 controls the small winning gaming state which is the gaming state at the time of the power outage (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-26). ), the production control CPU 120 that has received the gaming state designation command at the time of recovery executes the recovery notification production and displays a recovery display 09TM70 (in this example, including the characters "Recovering from power outage") on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the second promotion effect (in this example, the second promotion blinking effect, the second promotion image effect) is displayed, and the V judgment winning device LED 87L is turned red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds. It blinks (lights up) and causes the image display device 5 to display a second promotion image (second arrow image 09TM12A, characters "Please put the ball in the V").

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 controls each performance image (decoration pattern (in this example, initial A special combination of decorative symbols as a roll ("135"), a small symbol (in this example, "135"), the first reserved memory number (in this example, "0"), the second reserved memory number display area (in this example, In the example, a background image (in this example, a sunny background image) is displayed. However, the recovery display is an image that has a higher display priority than various effect images (the display layer is higher and it appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize various effect images.

In this example, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is determined to be "0.5 seconds" based on the fact that the remaining small winning period at the time of power outage restoration is 0.5 seconds or more (for example, 3 seconds). (See Figure 9-21).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (3), at the timing when 0.5 seconds, which is the execution period of the recovery notification effect, has elapsed (timing T4 shown in FIG. 9-26), the effect control CPU 120 starts the recovery notification effect. The notification effect is ended, and the recovery display 09TM70 (in this example, the image including the text "Recovering from power outage") is erased from the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the second promotion performance (in this example, the second promotion blinking performance, the second promotion image performance), and turns the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L into a red color at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds. (1 color), and a second promotion image (second arrow image 09TM12A, characters "Please put the ball in the V") is displayed on the image display device 5.

At this time, as the recovery notification effect is completed and the recovery display 09TM70 (in this example, the image including the words "Power outage is being restored") is erased from the entire screen of the image display device 5, each effect image It is possible to visually recognize (decorative patterns, small patterns, first reserved memory number display area, second reserved memory number display area, etc.) and a background image (in this example, a sunny background image).

In this way, after displaying the recovery display notifying that the power has been restored from a power outage, the background image and decorative patterns compatible with the [Normal Mode] can be immediately displayed even during a small winning game. Therefore, the player can understand that the player should aim (hit right) at the V judgment winning device 87 in order to win a V prize (win in the V winning area 870), and can prevent a small hit puncture in a small winning game. It is possible to reduce the possibility of this occurring and prevent the player from being at a disadvantage.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the small winning game state (timing T5 shown in FIG. 9-26), the performance control CPU 120 that has received the small winning end designation command starts the second promotion performance (in this example, the second promotion performance). 2 promotion blinking performance, 2nd promotion image production) is ended, the blinking (light emission) of the V judgment winning device LED 87L is ended, and the second promotion image is erased from the image display device 5.

At this time, the production control CPU 120 decides to display a special combination of decorative symbols as a combination of decorative symbols to be displayed after the end of the small winning game in the production determination process at the end of the small winning (see FIG. 9-16). It is assumed that it has been determined (step S09TM3080).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (4), at the timing when the small winning ending period ends (timing T6 shown in FIG. 9-26), the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode to [normal mode (sunny mode). )], and the special combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135") determined in the small hit end performance determination process is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The rest is the same as in FIG. 9-25 (20), so the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 9-27 (3), the gaming state when the power outage occurs is the small winning gaming state, so the combination of decorative symbols (initial roll) on the recovery start screen after the power is turned on. A special combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135") is displayed as , and as shown in Figure 9-27 (4), the small combination when the power is cut off and turned on during the small winning game is displayed. In the start screen of the performance mode [normal mode (sunny mode)] which is controlled after the end of the small winning game without being controlled to the jackpot game state based on the occurrence of the small winning blowout in the winning game. A special combination of decorative patterns (in this example, "135") is displayed as a combination of decorative patterns. Therefore, in FIGS. 9-27 (3) and (4), a special combination of common decorative symbols is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the player cannot see the common decorative symbols. It appears that a special combination of is displayed continuously.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (4), a special combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135") is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby changing the current gaming state. It is clearly recognized by the player that the control situation is when a power outage occurs during the small winning game state, and after the power is turned on, the control is returned to the normal state without winning a V prize during the small winning gaming state. can be done.

[Normal production mode (modified example)]
In the above embodiment, when the production mode is controlled from [Challenge Mode] or [Rush Mode] to [Normal Mode] (after exiting from the time saving mode), [Normal Mode (Sunny Mode)] is changed from [Normal Mode]. After that, when the production mode is controlled to [Normal Mode] and it is possible to switch the production mode, various production modes including [Normal Mode (Sunny Mode)] ([Normal Mode (Sunny Mode)] We have shown an example where it is possible to switch to [Normal mode (Cloudy mode)], [Normal mode (Cloudy mode)], [Normal mode (Rain mode)]). If the production mode can be switched when the production mode is controlled in [normal mode], a production mode of [normal mode] that cannot be switched may be set.

For example, set [Normal mode (revenge mode)] out of [Normal mode]. When the production mode is controlled to [normal mode (revenge mode)], the production control CPU 120 displays a ``volcano background image'' representing a volcanic landscape including a volcano as a background image of the decorative pattern. become.

This [normal mode (revenge mode)] production mode is always controlled when the production mode is controlled from [challenge mode] or [rush mode] to [normal mode] via time saving mode. That is, [normal mode (revenge mode)] is set as a fixed production mode that is controlled after the time-saving exit. After that, when the production mode is controlled to [Normal mode], if it is possible to switch the production mode at a predetermined opportunity (for example, the end of 20 fluctuating displays after exiting the time-saving mode), select [Normal mode]. It is possible to switch to various production modes ([Normal mode (sunny mode)], [Normal mode (cloudy mode)], [Normal mode (rainy mode)]) that do not include [Revenge mode]. mode (revenge mode)].

In addition, when the above embodiment is applied, when the production mode is controlled from [Challenge Mode], [Rush Mode], or [Hyper Rush Mode] to [Normal Mode] via a small hit puncture, A fixed production mode different from [normal mode (revenge mode)] may be set.

For example, when controlled to [normal mode] via time saving exit, [normal mode (revenge mode)] is set as a fixed production mode. After that, at a predetermined timing (for example, the 20 variable displays have finished after the time-saving exit), various production modes ([Normal mode (sunny mode)], [Normal mode (cloudy mode)], [Normal mode (rainy mode)] ]). On the other hand, when it is controlled to the [normal mode] via a small hit blowout, the [normal mode (sunny mode)] is set as a fixed performance mode.

[Game flow (modified example)]
In the modified example of the game flow shown in FIG. 9-28, a jackpot occurs when the production mode is [normal mode], and after the jackpot game state ends, the time saving state (low probability/high base state) is controlled, and [ Challenge mode] (Time saving 1 rotation + Holding 4 rotations) or [Hyper rush mode] (Time saving 99 rotations + Holding 4 rotations) If a jackpot occurs, [Rush mode] (Time saving 7 rotations + Holding 4 rotations) Or it shifts to [hyper rush mode] (time saving 99 rotations + pending 4 rotations), and if a jackpot does not occur, it shifts to [normal mode].

(1) When the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy/low base state) and the first flag, second flag, and third flag are not set, the production mode is set to [normal mode]. . (1D) As a production example when the production mode is [normal mode (revenge mode)], a volcano background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a background image of a decorative pattern.

In state (3), one variable display in the time-saving state in which all display results are "lost" and a pending memory (execution is pending (in this example, up to 4 When variable display) is executed, the state is controlled to state (1). In this example, when the state (3) is controlled to the state (1), the state is controlled to the state (1D) (the production mode is [normal mode (revenge mode)]).

In state (4), all display results are "lost", 7 variable displays in the time saving state, and a pending memory corresponding to the starting winning that occurred at this time (execution is pending (in this example, up to 4 When variable display) is executed, the state is controlled to state (1). In this example, when the state (4) is controlled to the state (1), the state is controlled to the state (1D) (the production mode is [normal mode (revenge mode)]).
The rest is the same as that in FIG. 9-6, so the explanation will be omitted.

(Means 09-1)
As shown in Figures 9-24 (15) and (16), decorations corresponding to the display result becoming "small win" in the variable display that was executed immediately before being controlled to the small win gaming state. "2V2" is displayed as a small winning combination of symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (stop display, fixed stop). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (20), the combination of decorative symbols is , "222", which is a jackpot combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the small winning combination of decorative symbols "2V2", is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

According to such a configuration, in the normal state (the performance mode is [normal mode]) that is controlled after a small hit puncture occurs in the small winning game state, the jackpot combination of decorative symbols "222" is selected as a combination of decorative symbols. ” is displayed, the display results are “off” in all of the variable display of the specified number of time-saving control and the pending memory stored during the time-saving state, and the normal state (the production mode is set to [Normal mode ]) Unlike the case where the small hit puncture occurs in the small winning game state and the control is changed to the normal state (the production mode is [Normal mode]), it is controlled to the normal state (the production mode is [Normal mode]). ), the player can be made to recognize it.

(Means 09-2)
As shown in step S09TM1070 of FIG. 9-9, when the presentation mode is one of [Challenge Mode], [Rush Mode], or [Hyper Rush Mode], and the display result is "Small hit" (YES in step S09TM1060), the production control CPU 120 selects the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed when the variable display ends in the [second special symbol] jackpot (for small win) combination determination table of decorative symbols. (See Figure 9-10 (B2)). That is, in the process of step S09TM1070, "a combination of decorative symbols for jackpot" and "a combination of decorative symbols for small win" are simultaneously determined as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display.

According to such a configuration, when a small hit puncture occurs in a small winning game state, it is only necessary to display a combination of decorative symbols determined in advance, and there is no need to perform complicated performance control. It is possible to reduce the processing load related to performance control when a hit or blowout occurs.

(Means 09-3)
As described above, in the process of step S09TM1070 in FIG. 9-9, "a combination of decorative symbols for jackpot" and "a combination of decorative symbols for small win" are simultaneously determined as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed when the variable display ends. are doing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-16, the small winning game state ends before being controlled to the [normal mode] production mode of the normal state that is controlled after a small winning puncture occurs in the small winning gaming state. In the performance determination process at the end of the small win, which is executed at the time of the small winning game, the performance control CPU 120 determines in advance to display the jackpot combination of decorative symbols as the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed after the small winning game ends ( Step S09TM3040).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-25 (17) to (20), when the control is set to the [normal mode] after a small hit puncture occurs, the performance control CPU 120 controls the first In addition to erasing the promotion images (first arrow image 09TM11A, characters "Aim for V", time gauge image 09TM11T), (A) jackpot combination of decorative symbols and (B) jackpot combination of the decorative symbols are reduced. Based on the fact that it has been decided in advance to display in the [normal mode] after the end of the winning game, the jackpot combination of decorative symbols (in this example) is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , "222") are displayed, and a sunny background image 09TM60A is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern.

According to such a configuration, when a small hit failure occurs in a small win game state, it is sufficient to display a predetermined combination of decorative symbols together with a background image, and the performance control when a small hit failure occurs. The processing burden associated with this can be reduced. In addition, at the timing when a small hit puncture occurs, the first promotion image for immediate V winning is erased, and the effect image (decorative pattern, background image, etc.) corresponding to [Normal mode] is displayed. To suppress a player's feeling of regret when he or she has won a small hit and to direct the player's attention to the game in a normal state.

(Means 09-4)
As shown in Figure 9-6, in states (3) and (4), all display results are "lost", the variable display of the specified number of times in the time saving state, and the starting winning that occurred at this time. When the corresponding hold memory is executed (after the time saving exit), the state (1A) is controlled (the production mode is [normal mode (sunny mode)]). That is, after the time saving exit, the sunny background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as the background image of the decorative pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-25 (20), when the control is set to the [normal mode] after a small hit puncture occurs, a sunny background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a background image of a decorative pattern. Therefore, there are cases where the time saving state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the small winning gaming state (time saving exit), and cases where control is returned to the normal state without V winning during the small winning gaming state (small winning In the case of a flat tire), the common sunny background image is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

According to such a configuration, there is no need to change the background image depending on the situation when the normal state is controlled, and the processing load of effect control when the normal state is controlled can be reduced. In addition, the common background image is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern regardless of the situation when the control is set to the normal mode, so even if the control is set to the [normal mode] after a small hit puncture occurs. Also, since the performance mode is the same as after the time-saving exit, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of regret.

(Means 09-5)
As shown in [Normal production mode (modified example)], when controlled to [Normal mode] via time saving, [Normal mode (Revenge mode)] is set as the fixed production mode. Ru. After that, at a predetermined timing (for example, the 20 fluctuating displays end after the time-saving break), various production modes ([Normal mode (sunny mode)], [Normal mode (cloudy mode)], [Normal mode (rainy mode)] ]). On the other hand, when controlled to the [normal mode] via a small hit blowout, the [normal mode (sunny mode)] is set as a fixed performance mode.

That is, when the mode is controlled to the [normal mode] via the time saving mode, the volcanic background image is displayed as a fixed background image. Thereafter, at a predetermined timing (for example, when the 20 variable displays are completed after the time-saving exit), it is possible to switch to the sunny background image, cloudy background image, and rainy background image. On the other hand, when controlled to the [normal mode] via a small hit puncture, a sunny background image different from the volcanic background image is displayed as a fixed background image.

According to such a configuration, when the control is changed to the [normal mode] via the time saving exit, a special background image (volcano background image) of the [normal mode] is displayed, so that the player can , it is possible to clearly recognize that the time saving state has ended. Furthermore, by displaying a special background image that is more visually appealing than a normal background image, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game. On the other hand, when the game is controlled to [Normal Mode] via a small hit puncture, a normal background image (sunny background image) with a more modest presentation than the special background image in [Normal Mode] is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of regret from increasing.

(Means 09-6)
As shown in FIG. 9-11, the performance control CPU 120 displays the symbol on the image display device 5 as a performance that is executed when the display result of the variable display being executed is a “big hit” or a “small hit”. In areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, at the timing when the decorative pattern should be stopped and displayed, the character of the decorative pattern (in this example, consisting of a numerical pattern or an alphabetic pattern and a character) takes an action (in this example, enlarges, A symbol stop motion effect is being executed.

As shown in step S09TM1040 of FIG. 9-9, when the production mode is [normal mode], the symbol stop action production can be executed, and as shown in step S09TM1080 of FIG. 9-9, the production mode It is also possible to execute the symbol stop motion effect even when the mode is in [Challenge Mode], [Rush Mode], or [Hyper Rush Mode]. In other words, the symbol stop motion performance can be executed regardless of the performance mode.

As shown in FIG. 9-25 (20), after a small hit puncture occurs, the production control CPU 120 controls the production mode to [normal mode (sunny mode)], and in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the jackpot combination (in this example, "222") of decorative symbols determined in the small win end performance determination process is displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 is not executing the symbol stop motion performance, and the decorative symbol character is not performing any action.

According to such a configuration, in the variable display where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win", the symbol stopping action performance is executed, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. On the other hand, when the control is changed to [Normal mode] via a small hit puncture, the symbol stop action effect is not executed, so even though no event advantageous to the player has occurred, the character's action To prevent a player from making a misunderstanding and subsequently feeling regretful about the player.

(Means 09-7)
As shown in FIG. 9-11, the performance control CPU 120 displays the symbol on the image display device 5 as a performance that is executed when the display result of the variable display being executed is a “big hit” or a “small hit”. In areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a pattern stop sound effect is executed in which a pattern stop sound effect is reproduced and output from speakers 8L and 8R at the timing when the decorative pattern should be stopped and displayed.

As shown in step S09TM1040 of FIG. 9-9, when the production mode is [normal mode], the symbol stop sound production can be executed, and as shown in step S09TM1080 of FIG. 9-9, the production mode The symbol stop sound effect can also be performed when the mode is in [Challenge Mode], [Rush Mode], or [Hyper Rush Mode]. In other words, the symbol stop sound effect can be executed no matter which effect mode the effect mode is.

As shown in FIG. 9-25 (20), after a small hit puncture occurs, the production control CPU 120 controls the production mode to [normal mode (sunny mode)], and in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the jackpot combination (in this example, "222") of decorative symbols determined in the small win end performance determination process is displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 is not executing the symbol stop sound performance and is not reproducing and outputting the symbol stop sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R.

According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by executing the symbol stop sound effect in the variable display where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." On the other hand, when the control is changed to [Normal mode] via a small hit puncture, the symbol stop sound performance is not executed, even though no event advantageous to the player has occurred. By executing this, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding and from increasing the player's sense of regret afterwards.

(Means 09-8)
As shown in FIG. 9-17, in the time saving final variation display where the display result is "miss", at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 9-17), The performance control CPU 120 that received the symbol confirmation B designation command causes the image display device 5 to display a result display. The timing at which this time saving final variation display is ended is the timing T2 or T5 shown in FIG. 9-7, and the control is made to the normal state at this timing. Therefore, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 when the time saving state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the small winning gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 9-18, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the control of the small winning game state (timing T3 shown in FIG. 9-18), the performance control CPU 120 receives the small winning end designation command. Based on the result display flag being set, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5. Also, the timing (when the small winning ending period (3 seconds) has elapsed and the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the next second special symbol (the variable display corresponding to the first pending memory among the four pending memories) Until the timing T4A shown in FIG. 9-18), the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the result on the image display device 5. Therefore, when the small winning game state is controlled to the normal state without winning a V prize, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 during the small winning ending period of the small winning gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 9-16, in the performance determination process at the end of the small win, if the V winning prize designation command is not received and the power failure recovery flag is set (if the process proceeds to step S09TM3080 and subsequent steps) ), the process for setting the result display flag (step S09TM3070) is not executed, so a power outage occurs during the small winning gaming state, and V does not win during the small winning gaming state after the power is turned on. Since the result display flag is not set when the normal state is controlled, the result display is not displayed on the image display device 5 when the normal state is controlled in the above situation.

According to such a configuration, when the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for a certain period of time when the state is controlled to the normal state after the time saving exit or when the normal state is controlled via the small hit puncture, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for a certain period of time. , the player can accurately recognize information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of awarded prize balls.

On the other hand, if a power outage occurs during the small winning gaming state and a small winning puncture occurs during the small winning gaming state after the power is turned on and the control is returned to the normal state, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5. It is possible to prevent the player's feeling of regret from increasing due to not being displayed. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which performance control that displays the result display after a power outage occurs and the power is turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the exact number of jackpots and the total number of awarded prize balls. It is possible to reduce the processing burden of effect control after the power is turned on, which is difficult to grasp.

(Means 09-9)
As shown in FIG. 9-17, in the time saving final variation display where the display result is "miss", at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 9-17), The production control CPU 120 that received the symbol confirmation B designation command displays a result display on the image display device 5 over a symbol confirmation period (10 seconds).

In addition, the image display device 5 The result display is displayed. Further, since the number of pending memories is 4, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for 1.5×4=6 seconds (period from T2A to T6 shown in FIG. 9-17).

As shown in FIG. 9-18, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the control of the small winning game state (timing T3 shown in FIG. 9-18), the performance control CPU 120 receives the small winning end designation command. A result display is displayed on the image display device 5 over the small winning ending period (3 seconds). That is, the display of the result display is started when the small winning game state is controlled.

In addition, the image display device 5 The result display is displayed. Further, since the number of pending memories is 4, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 for 1.5×4=6 seconds (period from T4A to T8 shown in FIG. 9-18). In other words, the period that combines the variable display period of these four pending memories and the symbol confirmation period is the combined period of the variable display period of the four pending memories and the symbol confirmation period shown in Figure 9-17. It is a period of common length.

According to such a configuration, when the control is returned to the normal state after the time-saving exit, the result display is displayed for a longer period than when the control is returned to the normal state via the small hit puncture. A player can accurately recognize information related to the number of jackpots and the total number of awarded prize balls. In addition, when the control is returned to the normal state via the small hit puncture, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 during the small winning ending period which is in the small winning gaming state, so that the number of jackpots and the number of jackpots awarded are displayed on the image display device 5. By making the player aware of the information related to the total number of prize balls that have been won, it is possible to suppress the player's feeling of regret due to a small hit.

(Means 09-10)
As shown in [Modified example of display/non-display of result display], (B-1) Time-saving final variable display where the display result is "small win" when the production mode is [Challenge mode] or [Rush mode] (B-2) When the production mode is [Hyper Rush Mode], the display result is a "small win" and the display result is a "small win". The CPU 120 does not cause the image display device 5 to display the result display.

According to such a configuration, information regarding the actual number of jackpots and the total number of awarded prize balls that are smaller than the number of jackpots that the player would have otherwise obtained and the total number of prize balls that are scheduled to be awarded is transmitted to the player. Since there is no need for the person to recognize the information, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 09-11)
As shown in FIG. 9-7, when the variable display in the time-saving state is executed seven times and all the display results are "off", the CPU 103 switches from the time-saving state to the normal state (Fig. 9-7 (timing of T5 shown in ).

In addition, as shown in <Symbol Confirmation Designation Command>, the "Symbol Confirmation B Designation Command" is used to end the variable display in which the display result is "miss" in the short time final variation display, and to end the variable display in which the display result is "miss" and the symbol confirmation period is 10 This is a production control command that specifies that the time is seconds.

As shown in FIG. 9-17, in the time saving final variation display where the display result is "miss", at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 9-17), The performance control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation B designation command causes the image display device 5 to display a result display based on having received the symbol confirmation B designation command.

According to such a configuration, the production control CPU 120 can accurately recognize the timing at which the time saving state is controlled to the normal state depending on whether or not the symbol confirmation B designation command is received, and the result display is It is also possible to accurately recognize the execution timing of the result performance to be displayed.

(Means 09-12)
As shown in FIG. 9-18, at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the control of the small winning game state (timing T3 shown in FIG. 9-18), the production control CPU 120 receives the small winning end designation command. A result display is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the small winning end designation command and the result display flag being set.

According to such a configuration, even in a situation where a small hit puncture occurs, the production control CPU 120 does not display the result depending on whether the small hit end designation command is received and whether the result display flag is set. It is possible to accurately recognize the execution timing of a result presentation for displaying.

(Means 09-13)
As shown in FIG. 9-19, the timing at which the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the next second special symbol (the variable display corresponding to the first pending memory among the four pending memories) (FIG. 9-19) At T4A) shown in , the production control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern designation command displays the result on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command and the fact that the result display flag is set. is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even in a situation where a small hit puncture occurs, the performance control CPU 120 displays the result depending on whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command is received and whether or not the result display flag is set. To accurately recognize the execution timing of a result performance to be displayed.

(Means 09-14)
As shown in FIG. 9-16, in the performance determination process at the end of the small win, if the V winning designation command is not received and the power failure recovery flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 It is decided to display a special combination of decorative symbols as a combination of decorative symbols to be displayed after the winning game ends (step S09TM3080). This special combination of decorative patterns is a combination of decorative patterns dedicated to the recovery start screen during the small winning game when the power is cut off and turned on during the small winning game.

As shown in FIG. 9-27 (4), at the timing when the small winning ending period ends (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 9-26), the production control CPU 120 changes the production mode to [normal mode (sunny mode)]. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a special combination of decorative symbols ("135" in this example) determined in the performance determination process at the end of the small hit is displayed.

According to such a configuration, by displaying a special combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the control status of the current gaming state is changed to a small winning game. A power outage occurs during the state, and the player can clearly recognize that the state is controlled to the normal state without winning a V prize during the small winning game state after the power is turned on.

(Means 09-15)
As shown above, the special combination of decorative symbols is a combination of decorative symbols that is different from the combination for missing decorative symbols. In particular, the special combination of decorative symbols is a combination of decorative symbols that is different from the second losing combination of decorative symbols that result in a reach state.

According to such a configuration, in this embodiment where the display result is more likely to be a "jackpot" or "small win" due to the reach state, a power outage occurs during a small win game, and the power supply is interrupted. By not displaying the combination of decorative symbols that result in a reach state when the machine is controlled to the normal state without winning a V during a small winning game after the small winning game has been inserted, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation or disappointment. It can be prevented.

(Means 09-16)
As shown in FIG. 9-20, in the demonstration display performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution conditions for the customer waiting demonstration performance are met, and determines whether the execution conditions for the customer waiting demonstration performance are satisfied. If so (YES in step S09TM4030), it has been decided to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect.

As shown in FIG. 9-21(A), when the power failure recovery flag is not set and the customer waiting time has elapsed for 60 seconds, condition No. "SP-01" is established, it is decided to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance, and the condition No. "SP-02" has been established and it has been decided to carry out a demonstration performance while waiting for customers.

According to such a configuration, on the start screen of the [normal mode] of the normal states controlled after a small hit puncture occurs, the combination of decorative symbols is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The period from when it is displayed until the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed can be varied depending on whether or not a power outage occurs during the small winning game state, and the period until the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed. You can set an appropriate period as follows.

(Means 09-17)
As shown in FIG. 9-21(B), when the gaming state at the time of restoration is a small winning gaming state, the execution period of the restoration notification performance is determined to be "0.5 seconds or less". If the recovery gaming state at the time of power outage recovery is a small winning gaming state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is set to a shorter period than the remaining small winning period, no matter which period the remaining small winning period is. ing. That is, before the small winning game state at the time of power failure recovery ends, the recovery notification performance ends and the display of the recovery display also ends.

As shown in FIG. 9-27 (3), at the timing when 0.5 seconds, which is the execution period of the recovery notification effect, has elapsed (timing T4 shown in FIG. 9-26), the effect control CPU 120 issues the recovery notification effect. The effect is ended, and the recovery display 09TM70 (in this example, the image including the words "recovering from power outage") is erased from the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, as the recovery notification effect is completed and the recovery display 09TM70 (in this example, the image including the words "Power outage is being restored") is erased from the entire screen of the image display device 5, each effect image It is possible to visually recognize (decorative patterns, small patterns, first reserved memory number display area, second reserved memory number display area, etc.) and a background image (in this example, a sunny background image).

According to such a configuration, after displaying the recovery display notifying that the power has been restored from a power outage, the background image and decorative pattern corresponding to the [normal mode] are immediately displayed even during a small winning game. Therefore, the player can understand that the player should aim for the V judgment winning device 87 (hit to the right) in order to win the V prize (win the prize in the V winning area 870). It is possible to reduce the possibility of a small hit and blowout, and to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage.

(Means 09-18)
As shown in Figure 9-12, in the small winning effect determination process, if the power failure recovery flag is not set, it is decided to execute the first promotion effect, and the power failure recovery flag is set. If so, it is decided to execute the second promotion effect.

As shown in Figure 9-13, the first promotional flashing performance among the first promotional performances is a performance that causes the V judgment winning device LED 87L to flash (light emit light) in rainbow colors (7 colors) at a flashing cycle of 0.5 seconds. Among the second promotion effects, the second promotion blinking effect is a performance that causes the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L to blink (light emit light) in red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds.

According to such a configuration, in this embodiment in which a jackpot occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 inside the V judgment winning device 87 (V winning) during the small winning game state, the small winning game In order to draw attention to the V judgment winning device 87 and ensure a V winning (winning in the V winning area 870) by blinking (light emitting) the V winning judging device LED 87L provided in the V judgment winning device 87 during the state. The player can be instructed to aim at the V judgment winning device 87 (to hit right).

In addition, by executing a second promotional flashing performance that is different from the first promotional flashing performance, the player is notified that the situation is different from the normal small winning game, and the first promotional flashing performance is different from the first promotional flashing performance. Also, in a performance mode with high urgency, it is possible to instruct the player to aim at the V judgment winning device 87 (hit right) in order to win a V prize (win a prize in the V winning area 870).

(Means 09-19)
As shown in FIG. 9-13, among the first promotion effects, the first promotion blinking effect is an effect in which the V judgment winning device LED 87L blinks (lights up) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds, and the second promotion effect Among them, the second promotion flashing effect is a performance that causes the V judgment winning device LED 87L to blink (light emit light) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds.

According to such a configuration, by executing the first promotion flashing effect, the player is instructed to aim (hit right) at the V judgment winning device 87 in order to win a V prize (win a prize in the V winning area 870). At the same time, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the small winning game state. On the other hand, by executing the second promotion flashing effect, the player is instructed to aim (hit right) at the V judgment winning device 87 in order to win a V prize (win in the V winning area 870), and also receive a small hit. It is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining period for which the gaming state is controlled is short and that there is a high degree of urgency to aim for the V judgment winning device 87.

(Means 09-20)
As shown in Figure 9-13, the first promotional flashing performance among the first promotional performances is a performance that causes the V judgment winning device LED 87L to blink (light emit light) in rainbow colors (7 colors), and the second promotional performance is Among them, the second promotion blinking effect is a effect that causes the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L to blink (light emit light) in red (one color).

According to such a configuration, by executing the first promotion flashing effect, the player is instructed to aim (hit right) at the V judgment winning device 87 in order to win a V prize (win a prize in the V winning area 870). At the same time, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the small winning game state. On the other hand, by executing the second promotion flashing effect, the player is instructed to aim (hit right) at the V judgment winning device 87 in order to win a V prize (win in the V winning area 870), and also receive a small hit. It is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining period for which the gaming state is controlled is short and that there is a high degree of urgency to aim for the V judgment winning device 87.

(Means 09-21)
As shown in FIG. 9-13, the first promotion performance is a performance executed during the small winning game, which includes the first promotion flash performance, promotion sound effect performance, and promotion image among the promotion flash performances. This is a performance that includes a first promotion image performance.

The first promotion flashing effect is a performance that causes the V judgment winning device LED 87L to blink (light emit light) in rainbow colors (7 colors) at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds. Further, the promotion sound effect is a production in which a promotion sound effect is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, the first promotion image effect is an effect that causes the image display device 5 to display the first promotion image. This first promotion image is an image that includes a first arrow image in the center of the screen that instructs the player to hit right in order to win a prize.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-13, the second promotion effect is the effect executed during the small winning game, and includes the second promotion blink effect among the promotion flash effects and the first promotion image effect among the promotion image effects. This is a production including 2 promotion image production.

The second promotional flashing performance is a performance that causes the V judgment prize winning device LED 87L to flash (light emit light) in red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds. Further, the second promotion image effect is an effect that causes the image display device 5 to display a second promotion image. This second promotion image is an image that includes a second arrow image in the center of the screen that instructs the player to hit right in order to win a prize.

According to such a configuration, the first promotion blinking performance is executed during the small winning game state where no power outage has occurred, so that the V judgment is performed in order to win the V prize (win the prize in the V prize winning area 870). It is possible to instruct the player to aim at the prize winning device 87 (to hit right) and to improve the interest of the game during the small winning game state.

On the other hand, when a power outage occurs during the small winning game state and the second promotional flashing effect is executed during the small winning gaming state after the power is turned on, the playback output regarding the audio from the speakers 8L and 8R is Even if the control is not activated, the system instructs the user to aim (hit to the right) at the V judgment winning device 87 in order to win a V prize (win a prize in the V winning area 870), and enter the small winning game state. It is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining controlled period is short and that there is a high urgency to aim for the V judgment winning device 87.

(Means 09-22)
As shown in FIGS. 9-14, the first arrow image is an image with a rainbow color (7 colors) display mode, and is a moving image that performs an animation operation. As shown in FIGS. 9-15, the second arrow image is an image whose display mode is white (one color), and is a still image without animation movement.

According to such a configuration, by displaying the first arrow image during a small winning game state where no power outage has occurred, a V judgment winning is made in order to make a V winning (winning in the V winning area 870). It is possible to instruct the player to aim at the device 87 (to hit right) and to improve the interest of the game during the small winning game state.

On the other hand, when a power outage occurs during the small winning game state and the second arrow image is displayed during the small winning gaming state after the power is turned on, V winning (winning to the V winning area 870) occurs. In addition to instructing the player to aim at the V judgment winning device 87 (by hitting right) in order to win, the remaining period of being controlled to the small winning gaming state is short, and there is a high degree of urgency to aim at the V judgment winning device 87. The player can be made aware of this.

(Means 09-23)
As shown in FIGS. 9-14, the first arrow image is an image with a rainbow color (7 colors) display mode, and is a moving image that performs an animation operation. As shown in FIGS. 9-15, the second arrow image is an image whose display mode is white (one color), and is a still image without animation movement. Therefore, the second arrow image has lower visibility than the first arrow image in terms of display color and animation operation (existence of operation, display range, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by displaying the first arrow image during a small winning game state where no power outage has occurred, a V judgment winning is made in order to make a V winning (winning in the V winning area 870). It is possible to instruct the player to aim at the device 87 (to hit right) and to improve the interest of the game during the small winning game state.

On the other hand, when a power outage occurs during the small winning game state and the second arrow image is displayed during the small winning gaming state after the power is turned on, V winning (winning to the V winning area 870) occurs. In addition to instructing the player to aim at the V judgment winning device 87 (by hitting right) in order to win, the remaining period of being controlled to the small winning gaming state is short, and there is a high degree of urgency to aim at the V judgment winning device 87. The player can be made aware of this.

[Other variations]
(1) In the above embodiment, if a small hit puncture occurs in the controlled small winning game state when the control is in [challenge mode] or [rush mode], the remaining time saving control number is 1 or more. In the above, an example was shown in which the time saving state is continuously controlled and the production mode is set when a small hit occurs. When a small hit puncture occurs in the controlled small winning game state, even if the remaining time saving control number is 1 or more, the time saving state is controlled to the normal state, and the production mode is set to [Normal]. mode].

(2) In the above embodiment, if a small hit puncture occurs in the controlled small winning gaming state while being controlled to [hyper rush mode], the control is not controlled to the time saving state but to the [normal mode]. Although this example is not limited to this form, even if a small hit puncture occurs in the small winning gaming state controlled in [Hyper Rush Mode], the remaining time saving control number will be reduced. If it is 1 or more, the time saving state is continuously controlled and the [hyper rush mode] may be controlled.

(3) In the above embodiment, when the display result is a "big hit" or "small hit", an example is shown in which the symbol stop action effect or the symbol stop sound effect is executed at a rate of 100%. The present invention is not limited to this form, and when the display result is a "big hit" or "small hit", a symbol stop action effect or a symbol stop sound effect may be executed at a rate different from 100%.

For example, the execution rate of the symbol stop action effect or the symbol stop sound effect may be different depending on the jackpot type, such that the jackpot type becomes "symbol 10R time-saving jackpot" or "11(10)R time-saving jackpot via small hit". In this case, the symbol stop motion performance or symbol stop sound performance is executed at a rate of 90%, and the jackpot type is "Symbol 3R time-saving jackpot", "6 (5) R time-saving jackpot via small hit", or "4 via small hit". (3) In the case of “R time saving jackpot”, the symbol stop motion performance and symbol stop sound performance are executed at a rate of 50%.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the display result is "big hit" or "small hit", no matter which production mode is used, the symbol stop motion production or Although we have shown an example in which the symbol stop sound effect is executed, it is not limited to this form, and when the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit", the pattern stop sound effect may be executed at a rate different from 100% depending on the effect mode. A symbol stop action effect or a symbol stop sound effect may be executed.

For example, when the production mode is controlled to [Normal mode], the symbol stop motion production and the symbol stop sound production are executed at a rate of 90%, and the production mode is [Challenge mode], [Rush mode], [ [Hyper Rush Mode], the symbol stop action effect and the symbol stop sound effect are executed at a rate of 50%.

(5) In the above embodiment, after a small hit puncture occurs, the production mode is controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)], and the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. We have shown an example in which the symbol stop action effect or symbol stop sound effect is not executed when the game is played, but the effect mode is not limited to this type of example. When the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is controlled and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a symbol stop action performance or a symbol stop sound performance may be executed.

For example, after a small hit puncture occurs, the production mode is controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)], and the symbol that is executed when the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The stop motion performance is defined as a "special symbol stop motion performance." This special symbol stop motion performance may be a performance in which the character of the decorative symbol performs an action smaller than the symbol stop motion performance, or may be a performance in which the character of the decorative symbol performs a larger action than the symbol stop motion performance. Further, the execution period of this special symbol stop action performance may be a shorter execution period than the execution period of the symbol stop action performance, or may be a longer execution period than the execution period of the symbol stop action performance.

In addition, after a small hit puncture occurs, the production mode is controlled to [normal mode (sunny mode)] and the symbol that is executed when the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The stop sound performance is defined as a "special symbol stop sound performance." This special symbol stop sound production is a production that reproduces and outputs a sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, and may be a production that reproduces and outputs a sound effect at a volume lower than that of the symbol stop sound production. The sound effect may be reproduced and output at a louder volume than the sound performance. Further, the execution period of the special symbol stop sound production may be a shorter execution period than the execution period of the symbol stop sound production, or may be a longer execution period than the execution period of the symbol stop sound production.

(6) In the above embodiment, when a power outage occurs during a small winning game and the power is turned on and the small winning game is controlled to the normal state without winning a V prize, the special combination of decorative symbols ” and an example where a power outage occurs during a game state other than the small winning game state and the “initial combination of decorative symbols” when the power is turned on is different from the “initial combination of decorative symbols”. The "special combination of decorative patterns" and the "initial combination of decorative patterns" may be the same.

For example, both the "special combination of decorative designs" and the "initial combination of decorative designs" may be the same combination of decorative designs (such as "135") as the "special combination of decorative designs", and the "special combination of decorative designs" may be a combination of decorative designs (such as "135"), It may be a combination of decorative patterns (such as "123") common to the "initial combination of".

(7) In the above embodiment, in the time saving final variable display, an example was shown in which the gaming state is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state at the timing when this variable display ends, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. In the time saving final variable display, the gaming state may be controlled from the time saving state to the normal state at a timing different from the timing at which this variable display ends.

For example, in the time saving final variable display, the gaming state is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state at the timing when this variable display starts.

(8) In the above embodiment, on the start screen of the [normal mode] of the normal state that is controlled after a small winning puncture occurs in the small winning gaming state, effect images such as decorative patterns, background images, active displays, etc. has been shown as an example, but it is not limited to this form, and the above various types of A different effect image from the effect image may be displayed.

For example, on the start screen of the [Normal Mode] of the normal states that are controlled after a small hit puncture occurs in the small winning gaming state, a promotion image (" (such as an image containing the words "Please return to left-handed batting") and an image notifying that the production mode has shifted to "normal mode" (such as an image containing the words "Entering sunny mode").

(9) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which both the symbol stop action performance and the symbol stop sound performance are executed when the display result is a “big hit” or “small hit”. Regardless of the form, when the display result is a "big hit" or "small hit", at least one of the symbol stop action performance and the symbol stop sound performance may be executed.

For example, if the display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the production mode is [Normal mode], both the symbol stop action production and the symbol stop sound production are executed, and the display result is When a "big hit" or "small hit" occurs, if the performance mode is a performance mode other than the [normal mode], only the symbol stop action performance is executed.

(10) In the above embodiment, when a fluctuating display in which the display result is a "small win" is executed, in the fluctuating start performance determination process that is executed at the fluctuating start, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed when the fluctuating display ends. Although we have shown an example in which "a combination of decorative symbols for a jackpot" and "a combination of decorative symbols for a small win" are determined at the same time, the display is not limited to this type of format. When executed, a "jackpot combination of decorative symbols" may be determined as a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display at a timing different from the start of the variation.

For example, when a variable display is executed where the display result is a "small win", in the variable start effect determination process that is executed at the start of the variation, the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display is set as "decorative symbols". Decide on the "small winning combination" and determine the "small winning combination of decorative symbols" that has been determined in advance at the timing at the end of fluctuation, the timing at the start of the small winning gaming state, the predetermined timing during the small winning gaming state, etc. A ``jackpot combination of decorative symbols'' corresponding to the ``combination for winning'' is determined.

(11) In the above embodiment, (A) the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing when the small winning end designation command is received, and (B) the image is displayed at the timing when the fluctuation pattern designation command is received. Although an example has been shown in which a result display is displayed on the device 5, the present invention is not limited to this form, and examples (A) and (B) may be applied depending on the gaming situation.

For example, if there is a pending memory at the end of the final time saving variation, (B) the result display is displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing when the variation pattern designation command is received, and if there is no pending memory at the end of the final time saving variation, (A) A result display is displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing when the small winning end designation command is received.

(12) In the above embodiment, when the gaming state at the time of restoration is a small winning gaming state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is longer than when the gaming state at the time of restoration is a gaming state other than the small winning gaming state. Although an example in which the period is short has been shown, the execution period of the recovery notification performance is not limited to this type of configuration, and may be set according to the gaming state at the time of recovery.

For example, if the gaming state at the time of recovery is a small winning gaming state, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is set to 0.5 seconds or less, and if the gaming state at the time of recovery is a jackpot gaming condition, the recovery notification effect is set to 0.5 seconds or less. The execution period is set to 0.5 seconds or less, and the gaming state at the time of recovery is the normal state excluding the period of the small winning gaming state and the period of the jackpot gaming state, or the time is shortened excluding the period of the small winning gaming state. If so, the execution period of the recovery notification effect is set to 1 second.

(13) In the above embodiment, when the gaming state at the time of recovery is a small winning gaming state, an example was shown in which the execution period of the recovery notification effect is set to a shorter period than the remaining small winning period. Not limited to this form, when the gaming state at the time of recovery is a small winning gaming state, the execution period of the recovery notification performance may be set to a period longer than the remaining small winning period.

For example, when the gaming state at the time of restoration is a small winning gaming state, the execution period of the restoration notification performance is set to 10 seconds. At this time, if the remaining small winning period is shorter than 10 seconds, the recovery notification performance ends after the small winning game state ends.

(14) In the above embodiment, when the power is restored from a power outage, the second promotion effect is executed, and when the recovery display ends, various effect images (decorative patterns, background images, etc.) are displayed. Although we have shown an example of (visible), the second promotion effect is executed when the power is restored from a power outage, and even if the recovery display ends, the various effects are not limited to this form. Images (decorative designs, background images, etc.) do not have to be displayed (even if they are difficult to see).

For example, the second promotion image effect of the second promotion effect is an effect that causes the second promotion image to be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This second promotion image is a black image displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and includes a second arrow image at the center of the screen that instructs you to hit right in order to win a prize, and a second arrow image at the bottom of the center of the screen. This is an image containing the words "Please put the ball in the V".

In this case, when the power is restored from the power outage, the second promotion effect is being executed, and even after the recovery display has finished displaying, various effect images (decorative patterns, background images, etc.) become difficult to see, and the right-hand hit is difficult. By not displaying information other than promoting information, the player can understand that the player should aim for the V judgment winning device 87 (hit right) in order to win a V prize (win in the V winning area 870). It is possible to further enhance the effect of being able to reduce the possibility of a small hit blowout occurring in a small winning game and prevent a player from being at a disadvantage.

(11) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the V-winning determination device and the grand prize opening are different devices, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. You can.

The feature section 09TM described above includes the following configurations.

The gaming machine of means 09-1 is
A gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes a variable display (variable display),
A variable means (V judgment prize winning device 87) that is controlled to an enterable state in which a game medium (game ball) can enter;
an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player, a special state (small winning gaming state) that is different from the advantageous state and in which the variable means is controlled to the enterable state, and a state after the advantageous state. A special state (time saving state) which is a controlled gaming state and in which variable display is executed more frequently than the normal state, and a state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling the special state (time saving state),
The state control means (CPU 103)
When the gaming medium that has entered the variable means passes through a specific area (V winning area 870), it can be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state);
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the game medium is controlled in the special state, it can be controlled to the normal state. When a win occurs and no V prize is won during the small win game, the control is returned to the normal state when the small win game state ends),
comprising a display control means (performance control CPU 120) capable of displaying a display result of variable display of decoration identification information on a display means (image display device 5);
The display control means includes:
In response to being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the normal state, a specific display result (a jackpot combination of decorative symbols (such as "333")) can be displayed on the display means as the display result. and
When the special state is being controlled, a special display result (small winning combination of decorative symbols (such as "3V3")) is displayed on the display means in response to being controlled to the special state. It is possible and
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the game medium is controlled in the special state, the specific display result can be displayed on the display means in the normal state after the special state. (When the control is returned to the normal state without winning a V prize during a small winning game, a jackpot combination of decorative symbols (such as "333") is displayed on the image display device 5)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the specific display result is displayed in the normal state after the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, thereby making the player aware that the game medium has been controlled in the special state. be able to.

The gaming machine of means 09-2 is
The gaming machine of means 09-1,
A determining means (a process for determining a display result) for determining whether to control to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state);
Display result determining means (processing in step S09TM1070 for determining a jackpot combination of decorative symbols) for determining the specific display result based on the fact that it has been determined that the control is in an advantageous state;
The determining means determines whether or not to control to the special state (small winning game state);
The display result determining means determines the special display result and the specific display result based on the fact that it is determined that the special state is controlled when the special state is controlled (processing of step S09TM1070). In this case, it is possible to determine the combination of decorative symbols for small winnings and the combination of decorative symbols for jackpot.
When the display control means (performance control CPU 120) is controlled in the special state and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, the display control means (performance control CPU 120) The specific display result determined by the display result determination means can be displayed on the display means (when the control is returned to the normal state without winning a V prize during the small winning game, the decoration determined in the process of step S09TM1070) Display the jackpot combination of symbols on the image display device 5)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is only necessary to display a specific display result that has been determined when the game medium does not pass through a specific area in the special state when the game medium is controlled to be in a special state, and complicated performance control is required. Since there is no need to perform this process, the processing load of production control can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 09-3 is
The gaming machine of means 09-1 or means 09-2,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
When the special state (small winning game state) is controlled, a predetermined firing display (a first promotion image including a first arrow image, a second promotion image including a second arrow image) prompting the user to shoot the game medium into a predetermined area is displayed. a promotional image) can be displayed on the display means,
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the game medium is controlled in the special state, the predetermined firing display is hidden and the background image of the decoration identification information corresponds to the normal state. It is possible to display the normal background image on the display means and the specific display result on the display means (in the case where the control is returned to the normal state without winning a V prize during the small winning game, the first promotion The image is erased, and a sunny background image corresponding to [Normal Mode (Sunny Mode)] of the normal state is displayed as the background image, and a jackpot combination of decorative patterns (such as "222") is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game medium does not pass through a specific area in the special state, it is only necessary to display the specific display result together with the normal background image, which eliminates complicated performance control. Since there is no need to perform this process, the processing load of production control can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 09-4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-3,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
When the control is in the normal state, any one of the plurality of types of normal background images (a sunny background image corresponding to [normal mode] among the normal states, a cloudy background image, a rainy background image, etc.) can be displayed on the display means,
When variable display is executed and the special state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled by the special state, and when the game medium changes from the special state to the normal state without passing through the specific area in the special state. A common normal background image can be displayed on the display means (when the time saving state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the small winning game state, and when the V (The same sunny background image is displayed when the game is controlled to the normal state without winning)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, there is no need to change the background image depending on the situation when the normal state is controlled, and the processing load of effect control can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 09-5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-4,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
When variable display is executed and the special state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled by the special state, a special background image can be displayed on the display means, and the special background image is displayed for a predetermined period of time. Later, a normal background image can be displayed on the display means (when the time saving state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the small winning game state, after displaying the volcano background image for 20 variations, the sunny background image, cloudy background image, or rainy background image),
When the game medium is controlled from the special state to the normal state without passing through the specific area in the special state, the display means displays the normal background image without displaying the special background image on the display means. (When the normal state is controlled without a V win during a small winning game, a sunny background image, a cloudy background image, or a rainy background image is displayed without displaying the volcano background image)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game medium is controlled from the special state to the normal state without passing through a specific area in the special state, the normal background image is displayed instead of the special background image. , it is possible to prevent the player's feeling of regret from increasing due to the special background image.

The gaming machine of means 09-6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-5,
The decoration identification information includes characters (the decoration pattern is composed of a numerical pattern and a character),
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
When displaying the specific display result on the display means in response to being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the normal state, an animation in which the character performs an action is displayed together with the specific display result. (When the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in response to being controlled to the jackpot game state in the normal state, a symbol stop action performance in which the character takes an action is executed),
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the game medium is controlled in the special state, displaying the specific display result on the display means in the normal state after the special state; , the above animation is not displayed (during a small winning game, the character is controlled to the normal state without winning a V prize, and when displaying the jackpot combination of decorative symbols, the symbol stop action effect in which the character performs an action is not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game medium is controlled from the special state to the normal state without passing through a specific area in the special state, the animation is not displayed, so the animation increases the player's sense of regret. You can prevent it from being put away.

The gaming machine of means 09-7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-6,
Equipped with sound output means (production control CPU 120 that controls speakers 8L and 8R),
The sound output means is
When the specific display result is displayed on the display means in response to being controlled to the advantageous state when the control is in the normal state, a specific sound can be output (a jackpot game in the normal state). When the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in response to being controlled by the state, a symbol stop sound effect is executed that reproduces and outputs a symbol stop sound effect),
When the special state is controlled and the game medium is controlled from the special state to the normal state without passing through the specific area in the special state, the specific display result is displayed on the display means. (a symbol stop sound that reproduces and outputs a symbol stop sound effect when a jackpot combination of decorative symbols is displayed when the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is controlled to the normal state without V winning during a small winning game) (Do not perform the performance)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game medium is controlled from the special state to the normal state without passing through the specific area in the special state, the specific sound is not output, so the specific sound increases the player's sense of regret. You can prevent it from happening.

The gaming machine of means 09-8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-7,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
When the variable display is executed and the special state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the special state, gaming value information regarding the gaming value given to the player can be displayed on the display means ( When the time saving state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the small winning gaming state until the final change in the time saving state, the result display is displayed on the image display device 5),
When the game medium is controlled to be in the special state and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, the gaming value information can be displayed on the display means in response to the end of the special state. (If the control is returned to the normal state without winning a V during the small winning game state, a result display is displayed on the image display device 5 during the small winning ending period of the small winning gaming state),
When controlled in the special state, when a power outage occurs in the special state and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state controlled after the power outage is restored, the gaming value information is Do not display on the display means (do not display the result display if a power outage occurs during the small winning game state and the power is turned on and the control returns to the normal state without winning a V prize during the small winning gaming state) )
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the display control means by not displaying the gaming value information after a power outage recovery in which it is difficult to grasp accurate gaming value information.

The gaming machine of means 09-9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-8,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
When the variable display is executed and the special state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the special state, gaming value information regarding the gaming value given to the player can be displayed on the display means for a first period. (When the time saving state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the small hit game state until the final change in the time saving state, the result display is displayed for 10 seconds (symbol confirmation period)),
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the special state is controlled, the gaming value information is displayed on the display means in response to the end of the special state during the first period. It is possible to display a second period that is shorter than that (if the game is controlled to the normal state without winning a V prize during a small winning game, the result display will be displayed for 3 seconds (small winning ending period))
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, even when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in a special state, the player's consciousness can be directed to the game value information, so that the player's sense of regret can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of means 09-10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-7,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
When the variable display is executed and the special state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the special state, gaming value information regarding the gaming value given to the player can be displayed on the display means ( When the time saving state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the small winning game state until the final change in the time saving state, a result display is displayed),
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the game medium is controlled in the special state, the game value information is not displayed on the display means (without winning a V prize during a small winning game). Do not display result display when controlled to normal state)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since it is not necessary for the player to recognize the gaming value information regarding the gaming value that is lower than the gaming value that is scheduled to be given when the gaming medium passes through the specific area, a decrease in interest is suppressed. can do.

The gaming machine of means 09-11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-10,
Equipped with command transmitting means (CPU 103) for transmitting commands related to games,
The state control means (CPU 103) changes the state from the special state to the normal state when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display performed in the special state. It is controllable (in the [rush mode] of the time saving state, if 7 fluctuating displays are executed without any "jackpot" or "jackpot via small hit" occurring, the time saving state will change to the normal state. controllable),
When the display control means (performance control CPU 120) receives a special end command corresponding to the end of the predetermined number of variable displays in the special state, the display control means (performance control CPU 120) transmits the gaming value information regarding the gaming value given to the player to the player. Can be displayed on the display means (result display is displayed based on receiving the design confirmation B designation command)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled to the normal state, the gaming value information can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

The gaming machine of means 09-12 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-10,
Suspension storage means (CPU 103) for storing suspension information (suspension storage) regarding variable display that has not been executed;
A command transmitting means (CPU 103) for transmitting commands related to the game,
The state control means (CPU 103) changes the state from the special state to the normal state when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display performed in the special state. It is controllable (in the [rush mode] of the time saving state, if 7 fluctuating displays are executed without any "jackpot" or "jackpot via small hit" occurring, the time saving state will change to the normal state. controllable),
The display control means (performance control CPU 120) is controlled to the special state based on the predetermined number of variable displays, and when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, the display control means (performance control CPU 120) When a special state end command corresponding to the end is received, game value information regarding the game value given to the player can be displayed on the display means (7th fluctuation display in [rush mode] among the time saving states). When is executed, the display result becomes "small win", and if you do not win V during the small win game, the result display will be displayed based on the reception of the small win end designation command)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the special state in which the game medium does not pass through the specific area ends, the game value information can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

The gaming machine of means 09-13 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-10,
Suspension storage means (CPU 103) for storing suspension information (suspension storage) regarding variable display that has not been executed;
A command transmitting means (CPU 103) for transmitting commands related to the game,
The state control means (CPU 103) changes the state from the special state to the normal state when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display performed in the special state. It is controllable (in the [rush mode] of the time saving state, if 7 fluctuating displays are executed without any "jackpot" or "jackpot via small hit" occurring, the time saving state will change to the normal state. controllable),
The display control means (performance control CPU 120) is controlled to the special state based on the predetermined number of variable displays, and when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, executes the variable display. When a command corresponding to the above command is received, game value information regarding the game value given to the player can be displayed on the display means (the 7th variable display is executed in [rush mode] in the time saving state). (Sometimes, if the display result is a "small win" and you do not win a V prize during the small win game, the result display will be displayed based on receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the next fluctuation display)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the next variable display is executed when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, the game value information can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

The gaming machine of means 09-14 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-13,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
A specific display result can be displayed on the display means in response to being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the normal state (when being controlled to the jackpot gaming state while being controlled to the normal state) In response to this, a jackpot combination of decorative patterns is displayed on the image display device 5),
When the gaming medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the game medium is controlled in the special state, the specific display result can be displayed on the display means in the normal state after the special state. (Displaying the jackpot combination of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 when the control is returned to the normal state without winning a V prize during the small winning game),
When a power outage occurs in the special state when the control is in the special state, and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state controlled after the power outage is restored, the specific display result and Different display results can be displayed on the display means. A special combination of decorative patterns (such as "135") that is different from the jackpot combination of symbols is displayed on the image display device 5)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when a power outage occurs in a special state while being controlled in a special state, it is determined that the game medium did not pass through a specific area in the controlled special state after the power outage is restored. Can be clearly recognized by the player.

The gaming machine of means 09-15 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-14,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
Decorative identification information in a reach state (decorative pattern combination in a reach state (“2” and “2”, etc.)) can be displayed on the display means,
When a power outage occurs in the special state when the control is in the special state, and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state controlled after the power outage is restored, the specific display result and As a different display result, a combination of decoration identification information that does not include the above-mentioned reach mode can be displayed on the display means (if a power outage occurs during a small winning game and the V winning during the small winning game after the power is turned on). When the machine is controlled to the normal state without any error, a special combination of decorative symbols (such as "135") that does not include a reach mode different from the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is displayed on the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when a power outage occurs in the special state when the game medium is controlled to be in a special state, and the game medium does not pass through a specific area in the controlled special state after the power outage is restored, the game This can prevent people from feeling regretful.

The gaming machine of means 09-16 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-15,
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the control is in the special state, from when the display result of the decoration identification information is displayed on the display means until the demonstration effect is executed. During the period, when a power outage occurs in the special state when the control is in the special state, and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state controlled after the power outage is restored, the decoration is It is longer than the period from when the display result of the identification information is displayed on the display means until the demonstration performance is executed (when the control is returned to the normal state without winning a V prize during the small winning game, the customer waiting demonstration performance The waiting time for a customer until this is executed is 60 seconds.On the other hand, a power outage occurred during a small winning game, and after the power was turned on, the system returned to the normal state without winning any V during the small winning game. (The waiting time for the customer until the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed is 10 seconds.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the period from when the display result of the decoration identification information is displayed on the display means until the demonstration effect is executed can be set to an appropriate period.

The gaming machine of means 09-17 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-16,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
When a power outage occurs, a recovery display (recovery display) can be displayed on the display means to notify that the power has been restored when the power is restored from the power outage,
When the control is in the special state, a power outage occurs in the special state, and it is possible to end the recovery display before the end of the controlled special state after the power outage is restored (small hit). If a power outage occurs during a game, the recovery display will end before the small winning game ends after the power is turned on),
After the recovery display has ended and the special state has not ended, the normal background image and decoration identification information corresponding to the normal state can be displayed (during a small winning game after the power is turned on). Displaying a sunny background image and a decorative pattern)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the normal background image and the decoration identification information can be displayed after the recovery from the power outage is notified and before the special state ends, so the player can play the game media. It is possible to understand the situation in which it is necessary to fire towards a specific area.

The gaming machine of means 09-18 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-1 to 09-17,
A light emitting means (V winning prize determination device LED87L) provided corresponding to the variable means,
A light emission control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling light emission of the light emission means,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
When controlled in the special state, it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light in the first light emitting mode (during the small winning game state, the V winning prize determining device LED 87L flashes in a rainbow color at a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds). Execute the first promotional flashing effect that flashes (lights up) in (7 colors)),
When controlled in the special state, a power outage occurs in the special state, and in the special state controlled after the power outage is restored, the light emitting means is set to a second light emitting mode having a different light emitting period from the first light emitting mode. (If a power outage occurs during the small winning gaming state, and the power is turned on, the V winning judging device LED 87L will flash in red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds.) ) to flash (light up) the second promotional flashing effect)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when a power outage occurs in the special state when the special state is controlled, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable means in the controlled special state after the power outage is restored. .

The gaming machine of means 09-19 is
The gaming machine according to means 09-18,
The first light emitting mode is a mode in which the light emitting means blinks in a first cycle (the blinking cycle of the first promotion blinking effect is 0.5 seconds),
The second light emitting mode is a mode in which the light emitting means blinks in a second cycle that is longer than the first cycle (the blinking cycle of the second promotion blinking effect is 2 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by causing the light emitting means to emit light in the first light emitting mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, and by causing the light emitting means to emit light in the second light emitting mode, it is possible to make the game more interesting. Players can be made aware of this.

The gaming machine of means 09-20 is
The gaming machine according to means 09-18 or means 09-19,
The first light emitting mode is a mode in which the light emitting means emits light in a plurality of light emitting colors (the light emitting colors of the first accelerated flashing effect are rainbow colors (7 colors)),
The second light emitting mode is a mode in which the light emitting means emits light in a less color than the first light emitting mode (the light emitting color of the first promotion flashing effect is red (one color)).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by causing the light emitting means to emit light in the first light emitting mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, and by causing the light emitting means to emit light in the second light emitting mode, it is possible to make the game more interesting. The player can be made aware of this.

The gaming machine of means 09-21 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-18 to 09-20,
Equipped with sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R),
When controlled in the special state, the light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting mode, a predetermined firing display prompting the user to fire the game medium into a predetermined area is displayed on the display means, and a predetermined sound is emitted. Output from the sound output means (during the small winning game state, perform a first promotional flashing effect that causes the V winning prize determining device LED 87L to flash (light emit light) in rainbow colors (7 colors) at a flashing cycle of 0.5 seconds, A first promotion image effect is executed to display a first promotion image including a first arrow image in the center of the screen that instructs the image display device 5 to hit right in order to win a V prize, and is promoted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Execute a promotional sound effect that plays and outputs the sound effect),
When the control is in the special state, a power cut occurs in the special state, and in the special state controlled after the power cut is restored, the light emitting means emits light in the second light emitting mode, and the predetermined firing display is displayed. While the predetermined sound is displayed on the display means, the predetermined sound is not output from the sound output means. A second promotion blinking effect is executed in which the LED 87L blinks (lights up) in red (one color) at a blinking cycle of 2 seconds, and the screen at the center of the screen instructs the image display device 5 to perform a right hit in order to win a V prize. (While executing the second promotion image production that displays the second promotion image including the second arrow image, the promotion sound effect production is not executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when a power outage occurs in a special state, the player can play the game media even if the sound output means is not activated in the special state controlled after the power outage is restored. It is possible to understand the situation in which it is necessary to fire towards a specific area.

The gaming machine of means 09-22 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 09-18 to 09-21,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
Displaying a predetermined firing display (a first promotion image including a first arrow image, a second promotion image including a second arrow image) that prompts the player to shoot the game medium into a predetermined area when controlled in the special state. is visible on the means;
When controlled in the special state, the predetermined firing display can be displayed in the first mode (during the small winning game state, the display mode is a rainbow-colored (7-color) image and an animation operation is performed. The first arrow image, which is a moving image, is displayed),
When controlled in the special state, a power outage occurs in the special state, and in the special state controlled after the power outage is restored, the predetermined firing display can be displayed in a second mode different from the first mode. (If a power outage occurs during the small winning game state and the power is turned on, during the small winning gaming state, the display mode is a white (one color) image and a still image with no animation operation.) 2 arrow images are displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when a power outage occurs in a special state, the predetermined firing display is displayed in the second mode different from the first mode in the special state controlled after the power outage is restored, thereby reducing the urgency. It is possible to make the player realize that the price is expensive.

The gaming machine of means 09-23 is
A gaming machine according to means 09-22,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
Displaying a predetermined firing display (a first promotion image including a first arrow image, a second promotion image including a second arrow image) that prompts the player to shoot the game medium into a predetermined area when controlled in the special state. is visible on the means;
The predetermined firing display of the second aspect has a smaller operating range or fewer display colors than the predetermined firing display of the first aspect (while the first arrow image is a moving image with many displayed colors). , the second arrow image is a still image with few displayed colors)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by displaying the predetermined firing display in the first mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, and by displaying the predetermined launch display in the second mode, it is possible to make it possible to increase the level of urgency. The player can be made aware of this.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes a variable display,
a variable means that is controlled to an entry-enabled state in which game media can enter;
an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player; a special state that is different from the advantageous state and in which the variable means is controlled to the enterable state; and a gaming state that is controlled after the advantageous state and is higher than the normal state. Also includes a special state in which variable display is frequently executed, and a state control means that can be controlled,
The state control means includes:
controllable to the advantageous state when the game medium that has entered the variable means passes through a specific area;
When the game medium is controlled to the special state and the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state, the control is possible to return to the normal state;
comprising a display control means capable of displaying the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information on the display means;
The display control means includes:
A specific display result can be displayed on the display means as the display result in response to being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the normal state;
When being controlled to the special state, a special display result different from the specific display result can be displayed on the display means in response to being controlled to the special state, and
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the special state when the game medium is controlled in the special state, the specific display result can be displayed on the display means in the normal state after the special state. A gaming machine characterized by:

Images